Home | Books | Headwords - Wordforms | A-Z | Gospels: chrestomathy - parallels | Commentaries-sources | Arak29 | Dictionaries | Գրաբարից-փոխարկիչ 
| < PreviousԵրկրորդ Օրէնք - 31 | Deuteronomy - 31Next > |
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ac▾ mh▾ all ▾ Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706In this chapter Moses, having finished his sermon, I. Encourages both the people who were now to enter Canaan (ver. 1-6), and Joshua who was to lead them, ver. 7, 8, 23. And, II. He takes care for the keeping of these things always in their remembrance after his decease, 1. By the book of the law which was, (1.) Written. (2.) Delivered into the custody of the priests, ver. 9, and 24-27. (3.) Ordered to be publicly read every seventh year, ver. 10-13. 2. By a song which God orders Moses to prepare for their instruction and admonition. (1.) He calls Moses and Joshua to the door of the tabernacle, ver. 14, 15. (2.) He foretels the apostasy of Israel in process of time, and the judgments they would thereby bring upon themselves, ver. 16-18. (3.) He prescribes the following song to be a witness against them, ver. 19-21. (4.) Moses wrote it, ver. 22. And delivered it to Israel, with an intimation of the design of it, as he had received it from the Lord, ver. 28, &c.Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831Moses, being one hundred and twenty years old and about to die, calls the people together, and exhorts them to courage and obedience, Deu 31:1-6. Delivers a charge to Joshua, Deu 31:7, Deu 31:8. Delivers the law which he hod written to the priests, with a solemn charge that they should read it every seventh year, publicly to all the people, Deu 31:9-13. The Lord calls Moses and Joshua to the tabernacle, Deu 31:14. He appears to them, informs Moses of his approaching death, and delivers to him a prophetical and historical song, or poem, which he is to leave with Israel, for their instruction and reproof, Deu 31:15-21. Moses writes the song the same day, and teaches it to the Israelites, Deu 31:22; gives Joshua a charge, Deu 31:23; finishes writing the book of the law, Deu 31:24. Commands the Levites to lay it up in the side of the ark, Deu 31:25, Deu 31:26. Predicts their rebellions, Deu 31:27. Orders the elders to be gathered together, and shows them what evils would befall the people in the latter days, Deu 31:28, Deu 31:29, and repeats the song to them, Deu 31:30.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880Deu 31:1, Moses encourages the people; Deu 31:7, He encourages Joshua; Deu 31:9, He delivers the law unto the priests to be read in the seventh year to the people; Deu 31:14, God gives a charge to Joshua; Deu 31:19, and a song to testify against the people; Deu 31:24, Moses delivers the book of the law to the Levites to keep; Deu 31:28, He makes a protestation.Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz DelitzschIV. Moses' Farewell and Death - Deuteronomy 31-34 With the renewal of the covenant, by the choice set before the people between blessing and curse, life and death, Moses had finished the interpretation and enforcement of the law (Deut 1:5), and brought the work of legislation to a close. But in order that the work to which the Lord had called him might be thoroughly completed, it still remained for him, before his approaching death, to hand over the task of leading the people into Canaan to Joshua, who had been appointed as his successor, to finish writing out the laws, and to hand over the book of the law to the priests. The Lord also directed him to write an ode, as a witness against the people, on account of their obstinacy, and teach it to the Israelites. To these last arrangements and acts of Moses, which are narrated in ch. 31 and 32, there are added in ch. 33 the blessing with which this man of god bade farewell to the tribes of Israel, and in ch. 34 the account of his death, with which the Pentateuch closes. John GillINTRODUCTION TO DEUTERONOMY 31Moses being old, and knowing he should quickly die, and must not go over Jordan with the people of Israel, acquaints them with it, and encourages them and Joshua to go over notwithstanding, and not be afraid of their enemies, since the Lord would go with them, and deliver them into their hands, Deut 31:1; and having written the law, he delivered it to the priests, and ordered that it should be read at the end of every seven years before all the people, that they and theirs might learn it, and fear the Lord, Deut 31:9; and whereas the death of Moses was very near, and the Lord foreseeing the people would quickly fall into idolatry, which would bring great calamities upon them, he directed Moses to write a song, which should be a witness for him, and against them, in ages to come; which Moses accordingly did, Deut 31:14; and Moses having given a charge to Joshua, and finished the writing of the law in a book, gave it to the Levites to put it in the side of the ark, Deut 31:23; and then ordered the chief of the tribes to be gathered together, that he might deliver the song, which by the direction and under the inspiration of God he had written, Deut 31:28; which song is recorded in Deut 32:1. |
|
31:131:1: Եւ կատարեա՛ց Մովսէս խօսե՛լ զամենայն զբանս զայսոսիկ առ ամենայն որդիսն Իսրայէլի։ Եւ [446]կատարեաց Մովսէս խօսել զամենայն`` զբանս զայսոսիկ առ ամենայն որդիսն Իսրայելի:1 Մովսէսը բոլոր իսրայէլացիներին այս բաները հաղորդելուց յետոյ նրանց ասաց. 31 Մովսէս գնաց բոլոր Իսրայէլին յայտնեց այս խօսքերը 31:1: Եւ կատարեա՛ց Մովսէս խօսե՛լ զամենայն զբանս զայսոսիկ առ ամենայն որդիսն Իսրայէլի։ 1 Մովսէսը բոլոր իսրայէլացիներին այս բաները հաղորդելուց յետոյ նրանց ասաց. 31 Մովսէս գնաց բոլոր Իսրայէլին յայտնեց այս խօսքերը zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:11: И пошел Моисей, и говорил слова сии всем [сынам] Израиля, [478] And Moses went and spake these words unto all Israel:31:1 καὶ και and; even συνετέλεσεν συντελεω consummate; finish Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs λαλῶν λαλεω talk; speak πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τούτους ουτος this; he πρὸς προς to; toward πάντας πας all; every υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:1 וַ wa וְ and יֵּ֖לֶךְ yyˌēleḵ הלך walk מֹשֶׁ֑ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses וַ wa וְ and יְדַבֵּ֛ר yᵊḏabbˈēr דבר speak אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the דְּבָרִ֥ים ddᵊvārˌîm דָּבָר word הָ hā הַ the אֵ֖לֶּה ʔˌēlleh אֵלֶּה these אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:1. abiit itaque Moses et locutus est omnia verba haec ad universum IsrahelAnd Moses went, and spoke all these words to all Israel, 1. And Moses went and spake these words unto all Israel. 1: И пошел Моисей, и говорил слова сии всем [сынам] Израиля, 31:1 καὶ και and; even συνετέλεσεν συντελεω consummate; finish Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs λαλῶν λαλεω talk; speak πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τούτους ουτος this; he πρὸς προς to; toward πάντας πας all; every υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:1 וַ wa וְ and יֵּ֖לֶךְ yyˌēleḵ הלך walk מֹשֶׁ֑ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses וַ wa וְ and יְדַבֵּ֛ר yᵊḏabbˈēr דבר speak אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the דְּבָרִ֥ים ddᵊvārˌîm דָּבָר word הָ hā הַ the אֵ֖לֶּה ʔˌēlleh אֵלֶּה these אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:1. abiit itaque Moses et locutus est omnia verba haec ad universum Israhel ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And Moses went, and spoke all these words to all Israel, |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ kad▾ mh▾ all ▾ Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 17061: Solemn Warnings; Joshua Encouraged.B. C. 1451.1 And Moses went and spake these words unto all Israel. 2 And he said unto them, I am a hundred and twenty years old this day; I can no more go out and come in: also the LORD hath said unto me, Thou shalt not go over this Jordan. 3 The LORD thy God, he will go over before thee, and he will destroy these nations from before thee, and thou shalt possess them: and Joshua, he shall go over before thee, as the LORD hath said. 4 And the LORD shall do unto them as he did to Sihon and to Og, kings of the Amorites, and unto the land of them, whom he destroyed. 5 And the LORD shall give them up before your face, that ye may do unto them according unto all the commandments which I have commanded you. 6 Be strong and of a good courage, fear not, nor be afraid of them: for the LORD thy God, he it is that doth go with thee; he will not fail thee, nor forsake thee. 7 And Moses called unto Joshua, and said unto him in the sight of all Israel, Be strong and of a good courage: for thou must go with this people unto the land which the LORD hath sworn unto their fathers to give them; and thou shalt cause them to inherit it. 8 And the LORD, he it is that doth go before thee; he will be with thee, he will not fail thee, neither forsake thee: fear not, neither be dismayed. Loth to part (we say) bids oft farewell. Moses does so to the children of Israel: not because he was loth to go to God, but because he was loth to leave them, fearing that when he had left them they would leave God. He had finished what he had to say to them by way of counsel and exhortation: here he calls them together to give them a word of encouragement, especially with reference to the wars of Canaan, in which they were now to engage. It was a discouragement to them that Moses was to be removed at a time when he could so ill be spared: though Joshua was continued to fight for them in the valley, they would want Moses to intercede for them on the hill, as he did, Exod. xvii. 10. But there is no remedy: Moses can no more go out and come in, v. 2. Not that he was disabled by any decay either of body or mind; for his natural force was not abated, ch. xxiv. 7. But he cannot any longer discharge his office; for, 1. He is 120 years old, and it is time for him to think of resigning his honour and returning to his rest. He that had arrived at so great an age then, when seventy or eighty was the ordinary stint, as appears by the prayer of Moses (Ps. xc. 10), might well think that he had accomplished as a hireling his day. 2. He is under a divine sentence: Thou shalt not go over Jordan. Thus a full stop was put to his usefulness; hitherto he must go, hitherto he must serve, but no further. So God had appointed it and Moses acquiesces: for I know not why we should any of us desire to live a day longer than while God has work for us to do; nor shall we be accountable for more time than is allotted us. But, though Moses must not go over himself, he is anxious to encourage those that must. I. He encourages the people; and never could any general animate his soldiers upon such good grounds as those on which Moses here encourages Israel. 1. He assures them of the constant presence of God with them (v. 3): The Lord thy God. that has led thee and kept thee hitherto will go over before thee; and those might follow boldly who were sure that they had God for their leader. He repeats it again (v. 6) with an emphasis: "The Lord thy God, the great Jehovah, who is thine in covenant, he it is, he and no less, he and no other, that goes before thee; not only who by his promise has assured thee that he will go before thee; but by his ark, the visible token of his presence, shows thee that he does actually go before thee." And he repeats it with enlargement: "Not only he goes over before thee at first, to bring thee in, but he will continue with thee all along, with thee and thine; he will not fail thee nor forsake thee; he will not disappoint thy expectations in any strait, nor will he ever desert thy interest; be constant to him, and he will be so to thee." This is applied by the apostle to all God's spiritual Israel, for the encouragement of their faith and hope; unto us is this gospel preached, as well as unto them He will never fail thee, nor forsake thee, Heb. xiii. 5. 2. He commends Joshua to them for a leader: Joshua, he shall go over before thee, v. 3. One whose conduct, and courage, and sincere affection to their interest, they had had long experience of; and one whom God had ordained and appointed to be their leader, and therefore, no doubt, would own and bless, and make a blessing to them. See Num. xxvii. 18. Note, It is a great encouragement to a people when, instead of some useful instruments that are removed, God raises up others to carry on his work. 3. He ensures their success. The greatest generals, supported with the greatest advantages, must yet own the issues of war to be doubtful and uncertain; the battle is not always to the strong nor to the bold; an ill accident unthought of may turn the scale against the highest hopes. But Moses had warrant from God to assure Israel that, notwithstanding the disadvantages they laboured under, they should certainly be victorious. A coward will fight when he is sure to be a conqueror. God undertakes to do the work--he will destroy these nations; and Israel shall do little else than divide the spoil--thou shalt possess them, v. 3. Two things might encourage their hopes of this:-- (1.) The victories they had already obtained over Sihon and Og (v. 4), from which they might infer both the power of God, that he could do what he had done, and the purpose of God, that he would finish what he had begun to do. Thus must we improve our experience. (2.) The command God had given them to destroy the Canaanites (ch. vii. 2; xii. 2), to which he refers here (v. 5, that you may do unto them according to all which I have commanded you), and from which they might infer that, if God had commanded them to destroy the Canaanites, no doubt he would put it into the power of their hands to do it. Note, What God has made our duty we have reason to expect opportunity and assistance from him for the doing of. So that from all this he had reason enough to bid them be strong and of a good courage, v. 6. While they had the power of God engaged for them they had no reason to fear all the powers of Canaan engaged against them. II. He encourages Joshua, v. 7, 8. Observe, 1. Though Joshua was an experienced general, and a man of approved gallantry and resolution, who had already signalized himself in many brave actions, yet Moses saw cause to bid him be of good courage, now that he was entering upon a new scene of action; and Joshua was far from taking it as an affront, or as a tacit questioning of his courage, to be thus charged, as sometimes we find proud and peevish spirits invidiously taking exhortations and admonitions for reproaches and reflections. Joshua himself is very well pleased to be admonished by Moses to be strong and of good courage. 2. He gives him this charge in the sight of all Israel, that they might be the more observant of him whom they saw thus solemnly inaugurated, and that he might set himself the more to be an example of courage to the people who were witnesses to this charge here given to him as well as to themselves. 3. He gives him the same assurances of the divine presence, and consequently of a glorious success, that he had given the people. God would be with him, would not forsake him, and therefore he should certainly accomplish the glorious enterprise to which he was called and commissioned: Thou shalt cause them to inherit the land of promise. Note, Those shall speed well that have God with them; and therefore they ought to be of good courage. Through God let us do valiantly, for through him we shall do victoriously; if we resist the devil, he shall flee, and God shall shortly tread him under our feet. Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch31:1Deut 31:1-13 describe how Moses promised the help of the Lord in the conquest of the land, both to the people generally, and also to Joshua, their leader into Canaan (Deut 31:2-8), and commanded the priests to keep the book of the law, and read it publicly every seventh year (Deut 31:9-13); and Deut 31:14-23, how the Lord appeared to Moses before the tabernacle, and directed him to compose an ode as a testimony against the apostasy of the people, and promised Joshua His assistance. And lastly, Deut 31:24-27 relate how the book of the law, when brought to completion, was handed over to the Levites; and Deut 31:28-30 describe the reading of the ode to the people. Deut 31:1-8 In Deut 31:1 Moses' final arrangements are announced. ויּלך does not mean "he went away" (into his tent), which does not tally with what follows ("and spake"); nor is it merely equivalent to porro, amplius. It serves, as in Ex 2:1 and Gen 35:22, as a pictorial description of what he was about to do, in the sense of "he prepared himself," or rose up. After closing the exposition of the law, Moses had either withdrawn, or at any rate made a pause, before he proceeded to make his final arrangements for laying down his office, and taking leave of the people. Deut 31:2 These last arrangements he commences with the declaration, that he must now bid them farewell, as he is 120 years old (which agrees with Ex 7:7), and can no more go out and in, i.e., no longer work in the nation and for it (see at Num 27:17); and the Lord has forbidden him to cross over the Jordan and enter Canaan (see Num 20:24). The first of these reasons is not at variance with the statement in Deut 34:7, that up to the time of his death his eyes were not dim, nor his strength abated. For this is merely an affirmation, that he retained the ability to see and to work to the last moment of his life, which by no means precludes his noticing the decline of his strength, and feeling the approach of his death. Deut 31:3-5 But although Moses could not, and was not to lead his people into Canaan, the Lord would fulfil His promise, to go before Israel and destroy the Canaanites, like the two kings of the Amorites; only they (the Israelites) were to do to them as the Lord had commanded them, i.e., to root out the Canaanites (vid., Deut 7:2.; Num 33:51.; Ex 34:11.). Deut 31:6 Israel was therefore to be of good courage, and not to be afraid of them (vid., Deut 1:21; Deut 20:3). Deut 31:7-8 Moses then encourages Joshua in the same way in the presence of all the people, on the strength of the promise of God in Deut 1:38 and Num 27:18. את־העם תּבוא, "thou wilt come with this people into the land." These words are quite appropriate; and the alteration of תּבוא into תּביא, according to Deut 31:23 (Samar., Syr., Vulg.), is a perfectly unnecessary conjecture; for Joshua was not appointed leader of the people here, but simply promised an entrance with all the people into Canaan. Deut 31:9-13 Moses then handed over the law which he had written to the Levitical priests who carried the ark of the covenant, and to all the elders of Israel, with instructions to read it to the people at the end of every seven years, during the festal season of the year of release ("at the end," as in Deut 15:1), viz., at the fast of Tabernacles (see Lev 23:34), when they appeared before the Lord. It is evident from the context and contents of these verses, apart from Deut 31:24, that the ninth verse is to be understood in the way described, i.e., that the two clauses, which are connected together by vav. relat. ("and Moses wrote this law," "and delivered it"), are not logically co-ordinate, but that the handing over of the written law was the main thing to be recorded here. With regard to the handing over of the law, the fact that Moses not only gave the written law to the priests, that they might place it by the ark of the covenant, but also "to all the elders of Israel," proves clearly enough that Moses did not intend at this time to give the law-book entirely out of his own hands, but that this handing over was merely an assignment of the law to the persons who were to take care, that in the future the written law should be kept before the people, as the rule of their life and conduct, and publicly read to them. The explanation which J. H. Mich. gives is perfectly correct, "He gave it for them to teach and keep." The law-book would only have been given to the priests, if the object had been simply that it should be placed by the ark of the covenant, or at the most, in the presence of the elders, but certainly not to all the elders, since they were not allowed to touch the ark. The correctness of this view is placed beyond all doubt by the contents of Deut 31:10. The main point in hand was not the writing out of the law, or the transfer of it to the priests and elders of the nation, but the command to read the law in the presence of the people at the feast of Tabernacles of the year of release. The writing out and handing over simply formed the substratum for this command, so that we cannot infer from them, that by this act Moses formally gave the law out of his own hands. He entrusted the reading to the priesthood and the college of elders, as the spiritual and secular rulers of the congregation; and hence the singular, "Thou shalt read this law to all Israel." The regulations as to the persons who were to undertake the reading, and also as to the particular time during the seven days' feast, and the portions that were to be read, he left to the rulers of the congregation. We learn from Neh 8:18, that in Ezra's time they read in the book of the law every day from the first to the last day of the feast, from which we may see on the one hand, that the whole of the Thorah (or Pentateuch), from beginning to end, was not read; and on the other hand, by comparing the expression in Deut 31:18, "the book of the law of God," with "the law," in Deut 31:14, that the reading was not restricted to Deuteronomy: for, according to v. 14, they had already been reading in Leviticus (ch. 23) before the feast was held - an evident proof that Ezra the scribe did not regard the book of Deuteronomy like the critics of our day, as the true national law-book, an acquaintance with which was all that the people required. Moses did not fix upon the feast of Tabernacles of the sabbatical year as the time for reading the law, because it fell at the beginning of the year, (Note: It by no means follows, that because the sabbatical year commenced with the omission of the usual sowing, i.e., began in the autumn with the civil year, it therefore commenced with the feast of Tabernacles, and the order of the feasts was reversed in the sabbatical year. According to Ex 23:16, the feast of Tabernacles did not fall at the beginning, but at the end of the civil year. The commencement of the year with the first of Tisri was an arrangement introduced after the captivity, which the Jews had probably adopted from the Syrians (see my bibl. Archaeol. i. 74, note 15). Nor does it follow, that because the year of jubilee was to be proclaimed on the day of atonement in the sabbatical year with a blast of trumpets (Lev 25:9), therefore the year of jubilee must have begun with the feast of Tabernacles. The proclamation of festivals is generally made some time before they commence.) as Schultz wrongly supposes, that the people might thereby be incited to occupy this year of entire rest in holy employment with the word and works of God. And the reading itself was nether intended to promote a more general acquaintance with the law on the part of the people, - an object which could not possibly have been secured by reading it once in seven years; nor was it merely to be a solemn promulgation and restoration of the law as the rule for the national life, for the purpose of removing any irregularities that might have found their way in the course of time into either the religious or the political life of the nation (Bhr, Symbol. ii. p. 603). To answer this end, it should have been connected with the Passover, the festival of Israel's birth. The reading stood rather in close connection with the idea of the festival itself; it was intended to quicken the soul with the law of the Lord, to refresh the heart, to enlighten the eyes, - in short, to offer the congregation the blessing of the law, which David celebrated from his own experience in Ps. 19:8-15, to make the law beloved and prized by the whole nation, as a precious gift of the grace of God. Consequently (Deut 31:12, Deut 31:13), not only the men, but the women and children also, were to be gathered together for this purpose, that they might hear the word of God, and learn to fear the Lord their God, as long as they should live in the land which He gave them for a possession. On Deut 31:11, see Ex 23:17, and Ex 34:23-24, where we also find לראות for להראות (Ex 34:24). John Gill31:1 And Moses went and spake these words unto all Israel. The following words, even to the whole body of the people summoned together on this occasion. It seems that after Moses had made the covenant with them he was directed to, he dismissed the people to their tents, and went to his own, and now returned, having ordered them to meet him again, very probably at the tabernacle; with which agrees the Targum of Jonathan, he"went to the tabernacle of the house of doctrine;''though, according to Aben Ezra, he went to the each tribes separately, as they lay encamped; his words are these,"he went to every tribe and tribe, to acquaint them that he was about to die, and that they might not be afraid, and to strengthen their hearts;''he adds,"in my opinion he then blessed them, though their blessings are afterwards written;''which is not improbable.John Wesley31:1 Went and spake - Continued to speak, an usual Hebrew phrase.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:1 MOSES ENCOURAGES THE PEOPLE AND JOSHUA. (Deut 31:1-8)Moses went and spake--It is probable that this rehearsal of the law extended over several successive days; and it might be the last and most important day on which the return of Moses to the place of assembly is specially noticed. In drawing his discourse towards a conclusion, he adverted to his advanced age; and although neither his physical nor intellectual powers had suffered any decay (Deut 34:7), yet he knew, by a special revelation, that the time had arrived when he was about to be withdrawn from the superintendence and government of Israel. |
|
31:231:2: Եւ ասէ ցնոսա. Հարիւր եւ քսա՛ն ամաց եմ ես այսօր, եւ ո՛չ եւս կարեմ ելանել եւ մտանել. քանզի Տէր ասաց ցիս, թէ ո՛չ անցանիցես ընդ այդ Յորդանան։ եւ ասէ ցնոսա. Հարեւր եւ քսան ամաց եմ ես այսօր, եւ ոչ եւս կարեմ ելանել եւ մտանել. [447]քանզի Տէր ասաց ցիս թէ ոչ անցանիցես ընդ այդ Յորդանան:2 «Այսօր ես հարիւր քսան տարեկան եմ, այլեւս չեմ կարող ո՛չ գնալ, ո՛չ գալ: Տէրն ինձ ասել է՝ “Յորդանան գետից այն կողմ չանցնես”: 2 Ու անոնց ըսաւ. «Ես այսօր հարիւր քսան տարեկան եմ։ Ա՛լ ելլելու ու մտնելու կարողութիւն չունիմ եւ Տէրը ինծի ըսաւ. ‘Դուն այս Յորդանանէն պիտի չանցնիս’։ 31:2: Եւ ասէ ցնոսա. Հարիւր եւ քսա՛ն ամաց եմ ես այսօր, եւ ո՛չ եւս կարեմ ելանել եւ մտանել. քանզի Տէր ասաց ցիս, թէ ո՛չ անցանիցես ընդ այդ Յորդանան։ 2 «Այսօր ես հարիւր քսան տարեկան եմ, այլեւս չեմ կարող ո՛չ գնալ, ո՛չ գալ: Տէրն ինձ ասել է՝ “Յորդանան գետից այն կողմ չանցնես”: 2 Ու անոնց ըսաւ. «Ես այսօր հարիւր քսան տարեկան եմ։ Ա՛լ ելլելու ու մտնելու կարողութիւն չունիմ եւ Տէրը ինծի ըսաւ. ‘Դուն այս Յորդանանէն պիտի չանցնիս’։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:22: и сказал им: теперь мне сто двадцать лет, я не могу уже выходить и входить, и Господь сказал мне: 'ты не перейдешь Иордан сей'; And he said unto them, I [am] an hundred and twenty years old this day; I can no more go out and come in: also the LORD hath said unto me, Thou shalt not go over this Jordan:31:2 καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak πρὸς προς to; toward αὐτούς αυτος he; him ἑκατὸν εκατον hundred καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty ἐτῶν ετος year ἐγώ εγω I εἰμι ειμι be σήμερον σημερον today; present οὐ ου not δυνήσομαι δυναμαι able; can ἔτι ετι yet; still εἰσπορεύεσθαι εισπορευομαι intrude; travel into καὶ και and; even ἐκπορεύεσθαι εκπορευομαι emerge; travel out κύριος κυριος lord; master δὲ δε though; while εἶπεν επω say; speak πρός προς to; toward με με me οὐ ου not διαβήσῃ διαβαινω step through; go across τὸν ο the Ιορδάνην ιορδανης Iordanēs; Iorthanis τοῦτον ουτος this; he 31:2 וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֣אמֶר yyˈōmer אמר say אֲלֵהֶ֗ם ʔᵃlēhˈem אֶל to בֶּן־ ben- בֵּן son מֵאָה֩ mēʔˌā מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֨ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty שָׁנָ֤ה šānˈā שָׁנָה year אָנֹכִי֙ ʔānōḵˌî אָנֹכִי i הַ ha הַ the יֹּ֔ום yyˈôm יֹום day לֹא־ lō- לֹא not אוּכַ֥ל ʔûḵˌal יכל be able עֹ֖וד ʕˌôḏ עֹוד duration לָ lā לְ to צֵ֣את ṣˈēṯ יצא go out וְ wᵊ וְ and לָ lā לְ to בֹ֑וא vˈô בוא come וַֽ wˈa וְ and יהוָה֙ [yhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אָמַ֣ר ʔāmˈar אמר say אֵלַ֔י ʔēlˈay אֶל to לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תַעֲבֹ֖ר ṯaʕᵃvˌōr עבר pass אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the יַּרְדֵּ֥ן yyardˌēn יַרְדֵּן Jordan הַ ha הַ the זֶּֽה׃ zzˈeh זֶה this 31:2. et dixit ad eos centum viginti annorum sum hodie non possum ultra egredi et ingredi praesertim cum et Dominus dixerit mihi non transibis Iordanem istumAnd he said to them: I am this day a hundred and twenty years old, I can no longer go out and come in, especially as the Lord also hath said to me: Thou shalt not pass over this Jordan. 2. And he said unto them, I am an hundred and twenty years old this day; I can no more go out and come in: and the LORD hath said unto me, Thou shalt not go over this Jordan. 2: и сказал им: теперь мне сто двадцать лет, я не могу уже выходить и входить, и Господь сказал мне: 'ты не перейдешь Иордан сей'; 31:2 καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak πρὸς προς to; toward αὐτούς αυτος he; him ἑκατὸν εκατον hundred καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty ἐτῶν ετος year ἐγώ εγω I εἰμι ειμι be σήμερον σημερον today; present οὐ ου not δυνήσομαι δυναμαι able; can ἔτι ετι yet; still εἰσπορεύεσθαι εισπορευομαι intrude; travel into καὶ και and; even ἐκπορεύεσθαι εκπορευομαι emerge; travel out κύριος κυριος lord; master δὲ δε though; while εἶπεν επω say; speak πρός προς to; toward με με me οὐ ου not διαβήσῃ διαβαινω step through; go across τὸν ο the Ιορδάνην ιορδανης Iordanēs; Iorthanis τοῦτον ουτος this; he 31:2 וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֣אמֶר yyˈōmer אמר say אֲלֵהֶ֗ם ʔᵃlēhˈem אֶל to בֶּן־ ben- בֵּן son מֵאָה֩ mēʔˌā מֵאָה hundred וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִ֨ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty שָׁנָ֤ה šānˈā שָׁנָה year אָנֹכִי֙ ʔānōḵˌî אָנֹכִי i הַ ha הַ the יֹּ֔ום yyˈôm יֹום day לֹא־ lō- לֹא not אוּכַ֥ל ʔûḵˌal יכל be able עֹ֖וד ʕˌôḏ עֹוד duration לָ lā לְ to צֵ֣את ṣˈēṯ יצא go out וְ wᵊ וְ and לָ lā לְ to בֹ֑וא vˈô בוא come וַֽ wˈa וְ and יהוָה֙ [yhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אָמַ֣ר ʔāmˈar אמר say אֵלַ֔י ʔēlˈay אֶל to לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תַעֲבֹ֖ר ṯaʕᵃvˌōr עבר pass אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the יַּרְדֵּ֥ן yyardˌēn יַרְדֵּן Jordan הַ ha הַ the זֶּֽה׃ zzˈeh זֶה this 31:2. et dixit ad eos centum viginti annorum sum hodie non possum ultra egredi et ingredi praesertim cum et Dominus dixerit mihi non transibis Iordanem istum ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And he said to them: I am this day a hundred and twenty years old, I can no longer go out and come in, especially as the Lord also hath said to me: Thou shalt not pass over this Jordan. |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-19142: Выражение «я не могу уже выходить и входить» означает не упадок сил Моисея, так как последний сохранил бодрость до конца жизни (Втор XXXIV:7), а то, что он уже перестает быть вождем (Чис XXVII:17) народа, так как Господь сказал ему: ты не перейдешь Иордана (Чис XX:7–13).Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:2: I am a hundred and twenty years old - The life of Moses, the great prophet of God and lawgiver of the Jews, was exactly the same in length as the time Noah employed in preaching righteousness to the antediluvian world. These one hundred and twenty years were divided into three remarkable periods: forty years he lived in Egypt, in Pharaoh's court, acquiring all the learning and wisdom of the Egyptians; (see Act 7:20, Act 7:23); forty years he sojourned in the land of Midian in a state of preparation for his great and important mission; (Act 7:29, Act 7:30); and forty years he guided, led, and governed the Israelites under the express direction and authority of God: in all, one hundred and twenty years.Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:2: I am an hundred and twenty years old - The 40 years of the wandering had passed since Moses, then 80 years old, "spake unto Pharaoh" (Exo 7:7; Compare Deu 34:7).I can, no more go out and come in - Render I shall not longer be able to go out and come in: i. e., discharge my duties among you. There is no inconsistency with Deu 34:7. Moses here adverts to his own age as likely to render him in future unequal to the active discharge of his office as leader of the people: the writer of Deu 34:1-12, one of Moses' contemporaries, remarks of him that up to the close of life "his eye was not dim, nor his natural force abated" Deu 31:7; i. e. that he was to the last, in the judgment of others, in full possession of faculties and strength. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:2: I am an: The life of Moses, the great prophet of Jehovah and lawgiver of the Jews, was exactly the same in length as the time Noah employed in preaching righteousness to the antediluvian world. These one hundred and twenty years were divided into three remarkable periods. Forty years he lived in Egypt, in the court of Pharaoh, acquiring all the learning and wisdom of the Egyptians (Act 7:20, Act 7:23); forty years he sojourned in Midian, in a state of preparation for his great and important mission (Act 7:29, Act 7:30); and forty years he guided, led, and governed the Israelites under the express direction and authority of God. in all 120 years. Deu 34:7; Exo 7:7; Jos 14:10, Jos 14:11; Psa 90:10; Act 7:23I can no more: Deu 34:7; Num 27:17; Sa2 21:17; Kg1 3:7 Thou shalt not: Deu 3:26, Deu 3:27, Deu 4:21, Deu 4:22, Deu 32:48-52; Num 20:12, Num 27:13, Num 27:14; Act 20:25; Pe2 1:13, Pe2 1:14 Geneva 159931:2 And he said unto them, I [am] an hundred and twenty years old this day; I (a) can no more go out and come in: also the LORD hath said unto me, Thou shalt not go over this Jordan.(a) I can no longer execute my office. John Gill31:2 And he said unto them, I am an hundred and twenty years old this day,.... Whether the meaning is, that that day precisely was his birthday, is a question; it may be the sense is only this, that he was now arrived to such an age; though Jarchi takes it in the first sense, to which are objected his words in Deut 31:14; yet it seems by Deut 32:48 that having delivered to the children of Israel the song he was ordered this day to write, on the selfsame day he was bid to go up to Mount Nebo and die: and it is a commonly received tradition with the Jews, that Moses died on the same day of the month he was born; See Gill on Deut 34:7.I can no more go out and come in; not that he could no longer go out of his tent and return without great trouble and difficulty, being so decrepit; but that he could not perform his office as their ruler and governor, or go out to battle and return as their general; and this not through any incapacity of body or mind, both being vigorous, sound, and well, as is clear from Deut 34:7; but because it was the will of God that he should live no longer to exercise such an office, power, and authority: also the Lord hath said unto me, or "for the Lord has said" (r), and so is a reason of the foregoing; the Targum is,"the Word of the Lord said:" thou shalt not go over this Jordan: to which he and the people of Israel were nigh, and lay between them and the land of Canaan, over which it was necessary to pass in order to go into it; but Moses must not lead them there, this work was reserved for Joshua, a type of Christ; not Moses and his law, or obedience to it, is what introduces any into the heavenly Canaan only Jesus and his righteousness; see Deut 3:27. (r) "praesertim cum et Dominus", V. L. sometimes signifies "for". See Noldius, p. 285. So Ainsworth and Patrick here. John Wesley31:2 Go out and come in - Perform the office of a leader or governor, because the time of my death approaches.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:2 also the Lord hath said--should be "for the Lord hath said" thou shalt not go over this Jordan. While taking a solemn leave of the people, Moses exhorted them not to be intimidated by the menacing opposition of enemies; to take encouragement from the continued presence of their covenanted God; and to rest assured that the same divine power, which had enabled them to discomfit their first assailants on the east of Jordan, would aid them not less effectually in the adventurous enterprise which they were about to undertake, and by which they would obtain possession of "the land which He had sworn unto their fathers to give them." |
|
31:331:3: Տէր Աստուած քո երթայ առաջի երեսաց քոց. նա՛ սատակեսցէ զազգսն զայնոսիկ յերեսաց քոց, եւ ժառանգեսցե՛ս զնոսա. եւ Յեսո՛ւ երթայ առաջի երեսաց քոց՝ որպէս խօսեցաւ Տէր[2040]։ [2040] Ոմանք. Եւ Յեսու որ երթայ առա՛՛։ Տէր Աստուած քո երթայ առաջի երեսաց քոց, նա սատակեսցէ զազգսն զայնոսիկ յերեսաց քոց, եւ ժառանգեսցես զնոսա. եւ Յեսու երթայ առաջի երեսաց քոց որպէս խօսեցաւ Տէր:3 Քո Տէր Աստուածը, որ ընթանում է քո առջեւից, Նա՛ պիտի վերացնի քո առջեւից այդ ազգերին, եւ դու պիտի տիրես նրանց: Յեսո՛ւն պիտի առաջնորդի քեզ, ինչպէս ասել է Տէրը: 3 Քու Տէր Աստուածդ ինք քու առջեւէդ պիտի անցնի ու այս ազգերը քու առջեւէդ ինք պիտի կորսնցնէ եւ դուն անոնց երկիրը պիտի ժառանգես։ Տէրոջը ըսածին պէս Յեսու պիտի երթայ քու առջեւէդ։ 31:3: Տէր Աստուած քո երթայ առաջի երեսաց քոց. նա՛ սատակեսցէ զազգսն զայնոսիկ յերեսաց քոց, եւ ժառանգեսցե՛ս զնոսա. եւ Յեսո՛ւ երթայ առաջի երեսաց քոց՝ որպէս խօսեցաւ Տէր[2040]։ [2040] Ոմանք. Եւ Յեսու որ երթայ առա՛՛։ 3 Քո Տէր Աստուածը, որ ընթանում է քո առջեւից, Նա՛ պիտի վերացնի քո առջեւից այդ ազգերին, եւ դու պիտի տիրես նրանց: Յեսո՛ւն պիտի առաջնորդի քեզ, ինչպէս ասել է Տէրը: 3 Քու Տէր Աստուածդ ինք քու առջեւէդ պիտի անցնի ու այս ազգերը քու առջեւէդ ինք պիտի կորսնցնէ եւ դուն անոնց երկիրը պիտի ժառանգես։ Տէրոջը ըսածին պէս Յեսու պիտի երթայ քու առջեւէդ։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:33: Господь Бог твой Сам пойдет пред тобою; Он истребит народы сии от лица твоего, и ты овладеешь ими; Иисус пойдет пред тобою, как говорил Господь; The LORD thy God, he will go over before thee, [and] he will destroy these nations from before thee, and thou shalt possess them: [and] Joshua, he shall go over before thee, as the LORD hath said:31:3 κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the θεός θεος God σου σου of you; your ὁ ο the προπορευόμενος προπορευομαι travel forth; travel before πρὸ προ before; ahead of προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your αὐτὸς αυτος he; him ἐξολεθρεύσει εξολοθρευω utterly ruin τὰ ο the ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste ταῦτα ουτος this; he ἀπὸ απο from; away προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your καὶ και and; even κατακληρονομήσεις κατακληρονομεω possess; give possession αὐτούς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even Ἰησοῦς ιησους Iēsous; Iisus ὁ ο the προπορευόμενος προπορευομαι travel forth; travel before πρὸ προ before; ahead of προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your καθὰ καθα just as ἐλάλησεν λαλεω talk; speak κύριος κυριος lord; master 31:3 יְהוָ֨ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֶ֜יךָ ʔᵉlōhˈeʸḵā אֱלֹהִים god(s) ה֣וּא׀ hˈû הוּא he עֹבֵ֣ר ʕōvˈēr עבר pass לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֗יךָ fānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face הֽוּא־ hˈû- הוּא he יַשְׁמִ֞יד yašmˈîḏ שׁמד destroy אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the גֹּויִ֥ם ggôyˌim גֹּוי people הָ hā הַ the אֵ֛לֶּה ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these מִ mi מִן from לְּ llᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֖יךָ fānˌeʸḵā פָּנֶה face וִֽ wˈi וְ and ירִשְׁתָּ֑ם yrištˈām ירשׁ trample down יְהֹושֻׁ֗עַ yᵊhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua ה֚וּא ˈhû הוּא he עֹבֵ֣ר ʕōvˈēr עבר pass לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֔יךָ fānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face כַּ ka כְּ as אֲשֶׁ֖ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] דִּבֶּ֥ר dibbˌer דבר speak יְהוָֽה׃ [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH 31:3. Dominus ergo Deus tuus transibit ante te ipse delebit omnes gentes has in conspectu tuo et possidebis eas et Iosue iste transibit ante te sicut locutus est DominusThe Lord thy God then will pass over before thee: he will destroy all these nations in thy sight, and thou shalt possess them: and this Josue shall go over before thee, as the Lord hath spoken. 3. The LORD thy God, he will go over before thee; he will destroy these nations from before thee, and thou shalt possess them: Joshua, he shall go over before thee, as the LORD hath spoken. 3: Господь Бог твой Сам пойдет пред тобою; Он истребит народы сии от лица твоего, и ты овладеешь ими; Иисус пойдет пред тобою, как говорил Господь; 31:3 κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the θεός θεος God σου σου of you; your ὁ ο the προπορευόμενος προπορευομαι travel forth; travel before πρὸ προ before; ahead of προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your αὐτὸς αυτος he; him ἐξολεθρεύσει εξολοθρευω utterly ruin τὰ ο the ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste ταῦτα ουτος this; he ἀπὸ απο from; away προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your καὶ και and; even κατακληρονομήσεις κατακληρονομεω possess; give possession αὐτούς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even Ἰησοῦς ιησους Iēsous; Iisus ὁ ο the προπορευόμενος προπορευομαι travel forth; travel before πρὸ προ before; ahead of προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your καθὰ καθα just as ἐλάλησεν λαλεω talk; speak κύριος κυριος lord; master 31:3 יְהוָ֨ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֶ֜יךָ ʔᵉlōhˈeʸḵā אֱלֹהִים god(s) ה֣וּא׀ hˈû הוּא he עֹבֵ֣ר ʕōvˈēr עבר pass לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֗יךָ fānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face הֽוּא־ hˈû- הוּא he יַשְׁמִ֞יד yašmˈîḏ שׁמד destroy אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the גֹּויִ֥ם ggôyˌim גֹּוי people הָ hā הַ the אֵ֛לֶּה ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these מִ mi מִן from לְּ llᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֖יךָ fānˌeʸḵā פָּנֶה face וִֽ wˈi וְ and ירִשְׁתָּ֑ם yrištˈām ירשׁ trample down יְהֹושֻׁ֗עַ yᵊhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua ה֚וּא ˈhû הוּא he עֹבֵ֣ר ʕōvˈēr עבר pass לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֔יךָ fānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face כַּ ka כְּ as אֲשֶׁ֖ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] דִּבֶּ֥ר dibbˌer דבר speak יְהוָֽה׃ [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH 31:3. Dominus ergo Deus tuus transibit ante te ipse delebit omnes gentes has in conspectu tuo et possidebis eas et Iosue iste transibit ante te sicut locutus est Dominus ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ The Lord thy God then will pass over before thee: he will destroy all these nations in thy sight, and thou shalt possess them: and this Josue shall go over before thee, as the Lord hath spoken. |
jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-19143: «Как говорил Господь». Ср. Чис XXVII:15–23; Втор I:38; III:28.Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:3: Joshua, he shall go over before thee - See on Num 27:17 (note), etc.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:3: thy God: Deu 9:3; Gen 48:21; Psa 44:2, Psa 44:3, Psa 146:3-6and Joshua: Deu 31:7, Deu 31:8, Deu 31:14, Deu 31:23, Deu 3:28, Deu 34:9; Num 27:18-21; Jos 1:2, Jos 3:7, Jos 4:14; Act 7:45; Heb 4:8, Jesus John Gill31:3 The Lord thy God, he will go over before thee,.... This he said to encourage the people of Israel; that though he should die, and not go over with them, their ever living and true God, the great Jehovah, the Lord of hosts, he would go before them, and fight their battles for them; so that they had nothing to fear from their enemies:and he will destroy those nations from before thee; the seven nations which then inhabited the land: and thou shalt possess them; their countries, cities, and houses, fields, and vineyards: and Joshua, he shall go over before thee; as their general to fight for them, subdue their enemies, and put them into the possession of the land, and divide it to them: as the Lord hath said; Deut 3:28. |
|
31:431:4: Եւ արասցէ Տէր ընդ նոսա որպէս արար ընդ Սեհոն եւ ընդ Ովգ, ընդ երկոսին թագաւորսն Ամովրհացւոց որ էին յայնկոյս Յորդանանու, եւ ընդ երկիր նոցա. Եւ արասցէ Տէր ընդ նոսա որպէս արար ընդ Սեհոն եւ ընդ Ովգ, ընդ [448]երկոսին թագաւորսն Ամովրհացւոց [449]որ էին յայնկոյս Յորդանանու``, եւ ընդ երկիր նոցա, ո՛րպէս [450]սատակեցաք զնոսա:4 Տէրը նրանց հետ պիտի վարուի այնպէս, ինչպէս վարուեց Սեհոնի ու Օգի հետ՝ Յորդանան գետի այն կողմում գտնուող ամորհացի երկու թագաւորների ու նրանց երկրի հետ, 4 Տէրը անոնց այնպէս պիտի ընէ, ինչպէս Ամօրհացիներու Սեհոն ու Ովգ թագաւորներուն եւ անոնց երկրին ըրաւ, զանոնք բնաջինջ ընելով։ 31:4: Եւ արասցէ Տէր ընդ նոսա որպէս արար ընդ Սեհոն եւ ընդ Ովգ, ընդ երկոսին թագաւորսն Ամովրհացւոց որ էին յայնկոյս Յորդանանու, եւ ընդ երկիր նոցա. 4 Տէրը նրանց հետ պիտի վարուի այնպէս, ինչպէս վարուեց Սեհոնի ու Օգի հետ՝ Յորդանան գետի այն կողմում գտնուող ամորհացի երկու թագաւորների ու նրանց երկրի հետ, 4 Տէրը անոնց այնպէս պիտի ընէ, ինչպէս Ամօրհացիներու Սեհոն ու Ովգ թագաւորներուն եւ անոնց երկրին ըրաւ, զանոնք բնաջինջ ընելով։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:44: и поступит Господь с ними так же, как Он поступил с Сигоном и Огом, царями Аморрейскими, и с землею их, которых он истребил; And the LORD shall do unto them as he did to Sihon and to Og, kings of the Amorites, and unto the land of them, whom he destroyed:31:4 καὶ και and; even ποιήσει ποιεω do; make κύριος κυριος lord; master αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καθὰ καθα just as ἐποίησεν ποιεω do; make Σηων σηων and; even Ωγ ωγ the δυσὶ δυο two βασιλεῦσιν βασιλευς monarch; king τῶν ο the Αμορραίων αμορραιος who; what ἦσαν ειμι be πέραν περαν on the other side τοῦ ο the Ιορδάνου ιορδανης Iordanēs; Iorthanis καὶ και and; even τῇ ο the γῇ γη earth; land αὐτῶν αυτος he; him καθότι καθοτι in that ἐξωλέθρευσεν εξολοθρευω utterly ruin αὐτούς αυτος he; him 31:4 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשָׂ֤ה ʕāśˈā עשׂה make יְהוָה֙ [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH לָהֶ֔ם lāhˈem לְ to כַּ ka כְּ as אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] עָשָׂ֗ה ʕāśˈā עשׂה make לְ lᵊ לְ to סִיחֹ֥ון sîḥˌôn סִיחֹון Sihon וּ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to עֹ֛וג ʕˈôḡ עֹוג Og מַלְכֵ֥י malᵊḵˌê מֶלֶךְ king הָ hā הַ the אֱמֹרִ֖י ʔᵉmōrˌî אֱמֹרִי Amorite וּ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to אַרְצָ֑ם ʔarṣˈām אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] הִשְׁמִ֖יד hišmˌîḏ שׁמד destroy אֹתָֽם׃ ʔōṯˈām אֵת [object marker] 31:4. facietque Dominus eis sicut fecit Seon et Og regibus Amorreorum et terrae eorum delebitque eosAnd the Lord shall do to them as he did to Sehon and Og the kings of the Amorrhites, and to their land, and shall destroy them. 4. And the LORD shall do unto them as he did to Sihon and to Og, the kings of the Amorites, and unto their land; whom he destroyed. 4: и поступит Господь с ними так же, как Он поступил с Сигоном и Огом, царями Аморрейскими, и с землею их, которых он истребил; 31:4 καὶ και and; even ποιήσει ποιεω do; make κύριος κυριος lord; master αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καθὰ καθα just as ἐποίησεν ποιεω do; make Σηων σηων and; even Ωγ ωγ the δυσὶ δυο two βασιλεῦσιν βασιλευς monarch; king τῶν ο the Αμορραίων αμορραιος who; what ἦσαν ειμι be πέραν περαν on the other side τοῦ ο the Ιορδάνου ιορδανης Iordanēs; Iorthanis καὶ και and; even τῇ ο the γῇ γη earth; land αὐτῶν αυτος he; him καθότι καθοτι in that ἐξωλέθρευσεν εξολοθρευω utterly ruin αὐτούς αυτος he; him 31:4 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשָׂ֤ה ʕāśˈā עשׂה make יְהוָה֙ [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH לָהֶ֔ם lāhˈem לְ to כַּ ka כְּ as אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] עָשָׂ֗ה ʕāśˈā עשׂה make לְ lᵊ לְ to סִיחֹ֥ון sîḥˌôn סִיחֹון Sihon וּ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to עֹ֛וג ʕˈôḡ עֹוג Og מַלְכֵ֥י malᵊḵˌê מֶלֶךְ king הָ hā הַ the אֱמֹרִ֖י ʔᵉmōrˌî אֱמֹרִי Amorite וּ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to אַרְצָ֑ם ʔarṣˈām אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] הִשְׁמִ֖יד hišmˌîḏ שׁמד destroy אֹתָֽם׃ ʔōṯˈām אֵת [object marker] 31:4. facietque Dominus eis sicut fecit Seon et Og regibus Amorreorum et terrae eorum delebitque eos ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the Lord shall do to them as he did to Sehon and Og the kings of the Amorrhites, and to their land, and shall destroy them. |
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-19144: См. Чис XXI; Втор II:31; III:1–17.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:4: Deu 2:33, Deu 3:3-11, Deu 3:21, Deu 7:2, Deu 7:16; Exo 23:28-31; Num 21:24-35John Gill31:4 And the Lord shall do unto them as he did unto Sihon, and to Og, kings of the Amorites,.... Deliver them up into their hands; see the history of this in Num 21:10,and unto the land of them whom he destroyed; put them into the possession of the land of Canaan, as they were now in possession of the land of those two kings he destroyed by them. This instance is given to encourage their faith, assuring them that what had been done to them would be done to the Canaanitish kings, and their subjects, and their lands. |
|
31:531:5: որպէս սատակեցաք զնոսա։ Եւ մատնեսցէ՛ զնոսա Տէր առաջի ձեր. եւ արասջիք ընդ նոսա որպէս պատուիրեցի՛ ձեզ։ եւ մատնեսցէ զնոսա Տէր առաջի ձեր, եւ արասջիք ընդ նոսա որպէս պատուիրեցի ձեզ:5 որ կոտորէք նրանց: Տէրը նրանց պիտի յանձնի ձեր ձեռքը, եւ դուք նրանց հետ պիտի վարուէք այնպէս, ինչպէս պատուիրել եմ ձեզ: 5 Տէրը զանոնք ձեր ձեռքը պիտի տայ ու իմ ձեզի բոլոր պատուիրածիս պէս պէտք է ընէք անոնց։ 31:5: որպէս սատակեցաք զնոսա։ Եւ մատնեսցէ՛ զնոսա Տէր առաջի ձեր. եւ արասջիք ընդ նոսա որպէս պատուիրեցի՛ ձեզ։ 5 որ կոտորէք նրանց: Տէրը նրանց պիտի յանձնի ձեր ձեռքը, եւ դուք նրանց հետ պիտի վարուէք այնպէս, ինչպէս պատուիրել եմ ձեզ: 5 Տէրը զանոնք ձեր ձեռքը պիտի տայ ու իմ ձեզի բոլոր պատուիրածիս պէս պէտք է ընէք անոնց։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:55: и предаст их Господь вам, и вы поступите с ними по всем заповедям, какие заповедал я вам; And the LORD shall give them up before your face, that ye may do unto them according unto all the commandments which I have commanded you:31:5 καὶ και and; even παρέδωκεν παραδιδωμι betray; give over αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him κύριος κυριος lord; master ὑμῖν υμιν you καὶ και and; even ποιήσετε ποιεω do; make αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καθότι καθοτι in that ἐνετειλάμην εντελλομαι direct; enjoin ὑμῖν υμιν you 31:5 וּ û וְ and נְתָנָ֥ם nᵊṯānˌām נתן give יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH לִ li לְ to פְנֵיכֶ֑ם fᵊnêḵˈem פָּנֶה face וַ wa וְ and עֲשִׂיתֶ֣ם ʕᵃśîṯˈem עשׂה make לָהֶ֔ם lāhˈem לְ to כְּ kᵊ כְּ as כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole הַ ha הַ the מִּצְוָ֔ה mmiṣwˈā מִצְוָה commandment אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] צִוִּ֖יתִי ṣiwwˌîṯî צוה command אֶתְכֶֽם׃ ʔeṯᵊḵˈem אֵת [object marker] 31:5. cum ergo et hos tradiderit vobis similiter facietis eis sicut praecepi vobisTherefore when the Lord shall have delivered these also to you, you shall do in like manner to them as I have commmanded you. 5. And the LORD shall deliver them up before you, and ye shall do unto them according unto all the commandment which I have commanded you. 5: и предаст их Господь вам, и вы поступите с ними по всем заповедям, какие заповедал я вам; 31:5 καὶ και and; even παρέδωκεν παραδιδωμι betray; give over αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him κύριος κυριος lord; master ὑμῖν υμιν you καὶ και and; even ποιήσετε ποιεω do; make αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καθότι καθοτι in that ἐνετειλάμην εντελλομαι direct; enjoin ὑμῖν υμιν you 31:5 וּ û וְ and נְתָנָ֥ם nᵊṯānˌām נתן give יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH לִ li לְ to פְנֵיכֶ֑ם fᵊnêḵˈem פָּנֶה face וַ wa וְ and עֲשִׂיתֶ֣ם ʕᵃśîṯˈem עשׂה make לָהֶ֔ם lāhˈem לְ to כְּ kᵊ כְּ as כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole הַ ha הַ the מִּצְוָ֔ה mmiṣwˈā מִצְוָה commandment אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] צִוִּ֖יתִי ṣiwwˌîṯî צוה command אֶתְכֶֽם׃ ʔeṯᵊḵˈem אֵת [object marker] 31:5. cum ergo et hos tradiderit vobis similiter facietis eis sicut praecepi vobis ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Therefore when the Lord shall have delivered these also to you, you shall do in like manner to them as I have commmanded you. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-19145: См. Чис XX:10–20.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:5: And the Lord: Deu 7:2, Deu 7:18according: Deu 7:23-25, Deu 20:16, Deu 20:17; Exo 23:32, Exo 23:33, Exo 34:12-16; Num 33:52-56 Geneva 159931:5 And the LORD shall give them up (b) before your face, that ye may do unto them according unto all the commandments which I have commanded you.(b) Into your hands. John Gill31:5 And the Lord shall give them up before your face,.... To ruin and destruction; the Targum of Jonathan is,"the Word of the Lord shall deliver them up:"that ye may do unto them according to all the commandments which I have commanded you; that is, utterly destroy them, make no covenant with them, enter into no alliances nor contract any marriages with them; but demolish their altars, cut down their groves, and break their images in pieces; of which last Aben Ezra interprets the words; but they are not to be restrained to that single instance; see Deut 7:1. |
|
31:631:6: Քա՛ջ լեր եւ զօրացի՛ր, մի՛ երկնչիր եւ մի՛ զանգիտեր, եւ մի՛ զարհուրեսցիս յերեսաց նոցա. զի Տէր Աստուած քո ինքնի՛ն է որ երթայցէ յառաջագոյն ընդ ձեզ ՚ի միջի ձերում. ո՛չ թողցէ զքեզ՝ եւ ո՛չ ընդ վայր հարկանիցէ[2041]։ [2041] Ոմանք. Որ երթայ յառաջագոյն քան զձեզ... ո՛չ թողցէ զձեզ եւ ո՛չ ընդ։ Քաջ լեր եւ զօրացիր, մի՛ երկնչիր, եւ մի՛ զանգիտեր, եւ մի՛ զարհուրեսցիս յերեսաց նոցա. զի Տէր Աստուած քո ինքնին է որ երթայցէ յառաջագոյն ընդ ձեզ ի միջի ձերում. ոչ թողցէ զքեզ եւ ոչ ընդ վայր հարկանիցէ:6 Քա՛ջ եղիր ու զօրացի՛ր, մի՛ երկնչիր ու մի՛ վախեցիր, մի՛ զարհուրիր նրանց ներկայութիւնից, քանի որ քո Տէր Աստուածն ինքը պիտի գնայ ձեր առջեւից, ձեր մէջ: Նա չի լքելու ձեզ ու չի անտեսելու ձեզ»: 6 Ուժովցէ՛ք ու քա՛ջ եղէք, մի՛ վախնաք ու անոնց երեսէն մի՛ զարհուրիք. քանզի ձեր Տէր Աստուածը ինք ձեզի հետ պիտի երթայ. անիկա ձեզ պիտի չթողու ու երեսէ պիտի չձգէ»։ 31:6: Քա՛ջ լեր եւ զօրացի՛ր, մի՛ երկնչիր եւ մի՛ զանգիտեր, եւ մի՛ զարհուրեսցիս յերեսաց նոցա. զի Տէր Աստուած քո ինքնի՛ն է որ երթայցէ յառաջագոյն ընդ ձեզ ՚ի միջի ձերում. ո՛չ թողցէ զքեզ՝ եւ ո՛չ ընդ վայր հարկանիցէ[2041]։ [2041] Ոմանք. Որ երթայ յառաջագոյն քան զձեզ... ո՛չ թողցէ զձեզ եւ ո՛չ ընդ։ 6 Քա՛ջ եղիր ու զօրացի՛ր, մի՛ երկնչիր ու մի՛ վախեցիր, մի՛ զարհուրիր նրանց ներկայութիւնից, քանի որ քո Տէր Աստուածն ինքը պիտի գնայ ձեր առջեւից, ձեր մէջ: Նա չի լքելու ձեզ ու չի անտեսելու ձեզ»: 6 Ուժովցէ՛ք ու քա՛ջ եղէք, մի՛ վախնաք ու անոնց երեսէն մի՛ զարհուրիք. քանզի ձեր Տէր Աստուածը ինք ձեզի հետ պիտի երթայ. անիկա ձեզ պիտի չթողու ու երեսէ պիտի չձգէ»։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:66: будьте тверды и мужественны, не бойтесь, и не страшитесь их, ибо Господь Бог твой Сам пойдет с тобою [и] не отступит от тебя и не оставит тебя. Be strong and of a good courage, fear not, nor be afraid of them: for the LORD thy God, he [it is] that doth go with thee; he will not fail thee, nor forsake thee:31:6 ἀνδρίζου ανδριζομαι man; valiant καὶ και and; even ἴσχυε ισχυω have means; have force μὴ μη not φοβοῦ φοβεω afraid; fear μηδὲ μηδε while not; nor δειλία δειλιαω intimidated μηδὲ μηδε while not; nor πτοηθῇς πτοεω frighten ἀπὸ απο from; away προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ὅτι οτι since; that κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the θεός θεος God σου σου of you; your ὁ ο the προπορευόμενος προπορευομαι travel forth; travel before μεθ᾿ μετα with; amid ὑμῶν υμων your ἐν εν in ὑμῖν υμιν you οὐ ου not μή μη not σε σε.1 you ἀνῇ ανιημι remiss; relax οὔτε ουτε not; neither μή μη not σε σε.1 you ἐγκαταλίπῃ εγκαταλειπω abandon; leave behind 31:6 חִזְק֣וּ ḥizqˈû חזק be strong וְ wᵊ וְ and אִמְצ֔וּ ʔimṣˈû אמץ be strong אַל־ ʔal- אַל not תִּֽירְא֥וּ tˈîrᵊʔˌû ירא fear וְ wᵊ וְ and אַל־ ʔal- אַל not תַּעַרְצ֖וּ taʕarṣˌû ערץ tremble מִ mi מִן from פְּנֵיהֶ֑ם ppᵊnêhˈem פָּנֶה face כִּ֣י׀ kˈî כִּי that יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֶ֗יךָ ʔᵉlōhˈeʸḵā אֱלֹהִים god(s) ה֚וּא ˈhû הוּא he הַ ha הַ the הֹלֵ֣ךְ hōlˈēḵ הלך walk עִמָּ֔ךְ ʕimmˈāḵ עִם with לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַרְפְּךָ֖ yarpᵊḵˌā רפה be slack וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַעַזְבֶֽךָּ׃ פ yaʕazᵊvˈekkā . f עזב leave 31:6. viriliter agite et confortamini nolite timere nec paveatis a conspectu eorum quia Dominus Deus tuus ipse est ductor tuus et non dimittet nec derelinquet teDo manfully and be of good heart: fear not, nor be ye dismayed at their sight: for the Lord thy God he himself is thy leader, and will not leave thee nor forsake thee. 6. Be strong and of a good courage, fear not, nor be affrighted at them: for the LORD thy God, he it is that doth go with thee; he will not fail thee, nor forsake thee. 6: будьте тверды и мужественны, не бойтесь, и не страшитесь их, ибо Господь Бог твой Сам пойдет с тобою [и] не отступит от тебя и не оставит тебя. 31:6 ἀνδρίζου ανδριζομαι man; valiant καὶ και and; even ἴσχυε ισχυω have means; have force μὴ μη not φοβοῦ φοβεω afraid; fear μηδὲ μηδε while not; nor δειλία δειλιαω intimidated μηδὲ μηδε while not; nor πτοηθῇς πτοεω frighten ἀπὸ απο from; away προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ὅτι οτι since; that κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the θεός θεος God σου σου of you; your ὁ ο the προπορευόμενος προπορευομαι travel forth; travel before μεθ᾿ μετα with; amid ὑμῶν υμων your ἐν εν in ὑμῖν υμιν you οὐ ου not μή μη not σε σε.1 you ἀνῇ ανιημι remiss; relax οὔτε ουτε not; neither μή μη not σε σε.1 you ἐγκαταλίπῃ εγκαταλειπω abandon; leave behind 31:6 חִזְק֣וּ ḥizqˈû חזק be strong וְ wᵊ וְ and אִמְצ֔וּ ʔimṣˈû אמץ be strong אַל־ ʔal- אַל not תִּֽירְא֥וּ tˈîrᵊʔˌû ירא fear וְ wᵊ וְ and אַל־ ʔal- אַל not תַּעַרְצ֖וּ taʕarṣˌû ערץ tremble מִ mi מִן from פְּנֵיהֶ֑ם ppᵊnêhˈem פָּנֶה face כִּ֣י׀ kˈî כִּי that יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֶ֗יךָ ʔᵉlōhˈeʸḵā אֱלֹהִים god(s) ה֚וּא ˈhû הוּא he הַ ha הַ the הֹלֵ֣ךְ hōlˈēḵ הלך walk עִמָּ֔ךְ ʕimmˈāḵ עִם with לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַרְפְּךָ֖ yarpᵊḵˌā רפה be slack וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַעַזְבֶֽךָּ׃ פ yaʕazᵊvˈekkā . f עזב leave 31:6. viriliter agite et confortamini nolite timere nec paveatis a conspectu eorum quia Dominus Deus tuus ipse est ductor tuus et non dimittet nec derelinquet te ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Do manfully and be of good heart: fear not, nor be ye dismayed at their sight: for the Lord thy God he himself is thy leader, and will not leave thee nor forsake thee. |
jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:6: Be strong - חזקו chizku, the same word that is used Exo 4:21 (note), Exo 9:15 (note), for hardening Pharaoh's heart. See the notes there. The Septuagint, in this and the following verse, have, Ανδριζου και ισχυε, Play the man, and be strong; and from this St. Paul seems to have borrowed his ideas, Co1 16:13 : Στηκετε εν τῃ πιστει· ανδριζεσθε, κρατιουσθε: Stand firm in the faith; play the man - act like heroes; be vigorous.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:6: Be strong: Deu 31:7, Deu 31:23, Deu 20:4; Jos 1:6, Jos 1:7, Jos 1:9, Jos 10:25; Ch1 22:13, Ch1 28:10, Ch1 28:20; Ch2 32:7; Psa 27:14; Isa 43:1-5; Hag 2:4; Zac 8:13; Co1 16:13; Eph 6:10; Ti2 2:1fear not: Deu 1:29, Deu 7:18, Deu 20:1, Deu 20:3, Deu 20:4; Num 14:9; Psa 27:1; Isa 41:10, Isa 51:12; Luk 12:32; Rev 21:8 he will not fail: Deu 4:31; Jos 1:5; Ch1 28:20; Isa 41:13-17; Heb 13:5 John Gill31:6 Be strong and of a good courage,.... The Septuagint version is,"play the men, and be strong;''be strong in the Lord, and in the power of his might, trusting and relying on him that goes before you; and so take heart, and be of good courage, and act the manly part; the apostle seems to refer to this passage, 1Cor 16:13,fear not, nor be afraid of them; their enemies, though so numerous, so mighty, and some of them of a gigantic stature, and their cities strong and well fenced: for the Lord thy God, he it is that doth go with thee: in comparison of whom, numbers of men, their strength of body, and fortified places, signify nothing: he will not fail thee, nor forsake thee; not fail to fulfil his promises to them, not leave them till he had given them complete victory over their enemies, put them into the possession of their land, and settled them in it. This promise, though made to literal Israel, belongs to the spiritual Israel of God, and is made good to every true believer in the Lord; see Heb 13:5. |
|
31:731:7: Եւ կոչեա՛ց Մովսէս զՅեսու՝ եւ ասէ ցնա առաջի ամենայն Իսրայէլի. Քա՛ջ լեր եւ զօրացի՛ր. քանզի դո՛ւ մտանելոց ես առաջի երեսաց ժողովրդեանդ այդորիկ, յերկիրն զոր երդուաւ Տէր հարցն ձերոց տալ նոցա. եւ դո՛ւ ժառանգեցուսցես զնոսա։ Եւ կոչեաց Մովսէս զՅեսու եւ ասէ ցնա առաջի ամենայն Իսրայելի. Քաջ լեր եւ զօրացիր. քանզի դու մտանելոց ես առաջի երեսաց ժողովրդեանդ այդորիկ յերկիրն զոր երդուաւ Տէր հարցն [451]ձերոց տալ նոցա, եւ դու ժառանգեցուսցես զնոսա:7 Մովսէսը կանչեց Յեսուին ու բոլոր իսրայէլացիների առջեւ ասաց նրան. «Քա՛ջ եղիր ու զօրացի՛ր, որովհետեւ այս ժողովրդին առաջնորդելով՝ դու պիտի մտնես այն երկիրը, որ ձեր հայրերի Տէրը երդուեց տալ նրանց, եւ դու պիտի նրանց սեփականութեան տէր դարձնես: 7 Մովսէս Յեսուն կանչեց ու բոլոր Իսրայէլի առջեւ անոր ըսաւ. «Ուժովցի՛ր ու քա՛ջ եղիր. քանզի այս ժողովուրդը դո՛ւն պիտի տանիս այն երկիրը, որ Տէրը անոնց հայրերուն երդում ըրաւ անոնց տալու։ Դուն պիտի տանիս, որ ժառանգեն։ 31:7: Եւ կոչեա՛ց Մովսէս զՅեսու՝ եւ ասէ ցնա առաջի ամենայն Իսրայէլի. Քա՛ջ լեր եւ զօրացի՛ր. քանզի դո՛ւ մտանելոց ես առաջի երեսաց ժողովրդեանդ այդորիկ, յերկիրն զոր երդուաւ Տէր հարցն ձերոց տալ նոցա. եւ դո՛ւ ժառանգեցուսցես զնոսա։ 7 Մովսէսը կանչեց Յեսուին ու բոլոր իսրայէլացիների առջեւ ասաց նրան. «Քա՛ջ եղիր ու զօրացի՛ր, որովհետեւ այս ժողովրդին առաջնորդելով՝ դու պիտի մտնես այն երկիրը, որ ձեր հայրերի Տէրը երդուեց տալ նրանց, եւ դու պիտի նրանց սեփականութեան տէր դարձնես: 7 Մովսէս Յեսուն կանչեց ու բոլոր Իսրայէլի առջեւ անոր ըսաւ. «Ուժովցի՛ր ու քա՛ջ եղիր. քանզի այս ժողովուրդը դո՛ւն պիտի տանիս այն երկիրը, որ Տէրը անոնց հայրերուն երդում ըրաւ անոնց տալու։ Դուն պիտի տանիս, որ ժառանգեն։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:77: И призвал Моисей Иисуса и пред очами всех Израильтян сказал ему: будь тверд и мужествен, ибо ты войдешь с народом сим в землю, которую Господь клялся отцам его дать ему, и ты разделишь ее на уделы ему; And Moses called unto Joshua, and said unto him in the sight of all Israel, Be strong and of a good courage: for thou must go with this people unto the land which the LORD hath sworn unto their fathers to give them; and thou shalt cause them to inherit it:31:7 καὶ και and; even ἐκάλεσεν καλεω call; invite Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs Ἰησοῦν ιησους Iēsous; Iisus καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak αὐτῷ αυτος he; him ἔναντι εναντι next to; in the presence of παντὸς πας all; every Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ἀνδρίζου ανδριζομαι man; valiant καὶ και and; even ἴσχυε ισχυω have means; have force σὺ συ you γὰρ γαρ for εἰσελεύσῃ εισερχομαι enter; go in πρὸ προ before; ahead of προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of τοῦ ο the λαοῦ λαος populace; population τούτου ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσεν ομνυω swear κύριος κυριος lord; master τοῖς ο the πατράσιν πατηρ father ἡμῶν ημων our δοῦναι διδωμι give; deposit αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even σὺ συ you κατακληρονομήσεις κατακληρονομεω possess; give possession αὐτὴν αυτος he; him αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him 31:7 וַ wa וְ and יִּקְרָ֨א yyiqrˌā קרא call מֹשֶׁ֜ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses לִֽ lˈi לְ to יהֹושֻׁ֗עַ yhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֨אמֶר yyˌōmer אמר say אֵלָ֜יו ʔēlˈāʸw אֶל to לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵינֵ֣י ʕênˈê עַיִן eye כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵל֮ yiśrāʔēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel חֲזַ֣ק ḥᵃzˈaq חזק be strong וֶ we וְ and אֱמָץ֒ ʔᵉmˌāṣ אמץ be strong כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that אַתָּ֗ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you תָּבֹוא֙ tāvô בוא come אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת together with הָ hā הַ the עָ֣ם ʕˈām עַם people הַ ha הַ the זֶּ֔ה zzˈeh זֶה this אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אָ֕רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבַּ֧ע nišbˈaʕ שׁבע swear יְהוָ֛ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH לַ la לְ to אֲבֹתָ֖ם ʔᵃvōṯˌām אָב father לָ lā לְ to תֵ֣ת ṯˈēṯ נתן give לָהֶ֑ם lāhˈem לְ to וְ wᵊ וְ and אַתָּ֖ה ʔattˌā אַתָּה you תַּנְחִילֶ֥נָּה tanḥîlˌennā נחל take possession אֹותָֽם׃ ʔôṯˈām אֵת [object marker] 31:7. vocavitque Moses Iosue et dixit ei coram omni Israhel confortare et esto robustus tu enim introduces populum istum in terram quam daturum se patribus eorum iuravit Dominus et tu eam sorte dividesAnd Moses called Josue, and said to him before all Israel: Take courage, and be valiant: for thou shalt bring this people into the land which the Lord swore he would give to their fathers, and thou shalt divide it by lot. 7. And Moses called unto Joshua, and said unto him in the sight of all Israel, Be strong and of a good courage: for thou shalt go with this people into the land which the LORD hath sworn unto their fathers to give them; and thou shalt cause them to inherit it. 7: И призвал Моисей Иисуса и пред очами всех Израильтян сказал ему: будь тверд и мужествен, ибо ты войдешь с народом сим в землю, которую Господь клялся отцам его дать ему, и ты разделишь ее на уделы ему; 31:7 καὶ και and; even ἐκάλεσεν καλεω call; invite Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs Ἰησοῦν ιησους Iēsous; Iisus καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak αὐτῷ αυτος he; him ἔναντι εναντι next to; in the presence of παντὸς πας all; every Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ἀνδρίζου ανδριζομαι man; valiant καὶ και and; even ἴσχυε ισχυω have means; have force σὺ συ you γὰρ γαρ for εἰσελεύσῃ εισερχομαι enter; go in πρὸ προ before; ahead of προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of τοῦ ο the λαοῦ λαος populace; population τούτου ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσεν ομνυω swear κύριος κυριος lord; master τοῖς ο the πατράσιν πατηρ father ἡμῶν ημων our δοῦναι διδωμι give; deposit αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even σὺ συ you κατακληρονομήσεις κατακληρονομεω possess; give possession αὐτὴν αυτος he; him αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him 31:7 וַ wa וְ and יִּקְרָ֨א yyiqrˌā קרא call מֹשֶׁ֜ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses לִֽ lˈi לְ to יהֹושֻׁ֗עַ yhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֨אמֶר yyˌōmer אמר say אֵלָ֜יו ʔēlˈāʸw אֶל to לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵינֵ֣י ʕênˈê עַיִן eye כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵל֮ yiśrāʔēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel חֲזַ֣ק ḥᵃzˈaq חזק be strong וֶ we וְ and אֱמָץ֒ ʔᵉmˌāṣ אמץ be strong כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that אַתָּ֗ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you תָּבֹוא֙ tāvô בוא come אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת together with הָ hā הַ the עָ֣ם ʕˈām עַם people הַ ha הַ the זֶּ֔ה zzˈeh זֶה this אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אָ֕רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבַּ֧ע nišbˈaʕ שׁבע swear יְהוָ֛ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH לַ la לְ to אֲבֹתָ֖ם ʔᵃvōṯˌām אָב father לָ lā לְ to תֵ֣ת ṯˈēṯ נתן give לָהֶ֑ם lāhˈem לְ to וְ wᵊ וְ and אַתָּ֖ה ʔattˌā אַתָּה you תַּנְחִילֶ֥נָּה tanḥîlˌennā נחל take possession אֹותָֽם׃ ʔôṯˈām אֵת [object marker] 31:7. vocavitque Moses Iosue et dixit ei coram omni Israhel confortare et esto robustus tu enim introduces populum istum in terram quam daturum se patribus eorum iuravit Dominus et tu eam sorte divides ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And Moses called Josue, and said to him before all Israel: Take courage, and be valiant: for thou shalt bring this people into the land which the Lord swore he would give to their fathers, and thou shalt divide it by lot. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾ Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:7: Moses hands over to Joshua that office as leader of the people, to which he had already been designated Deu 1:38; Num 27:23. He assigns also to the Levitical priests and the elders, as the ecclesiastical and civil heads of the nation, the responsibility of teaching the law and enforcing its observance Deu 31:10-13. Both these were symbolic acts, designed to mark the responsibility of the parties concerned after the death of Moses.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:7: Be strong: Deu 31:6, Deu 31:23, Deu 1:38, Deu 3:28; Jos 1:6; Dan 10:19; Eph 6:10for thou must: Deu 31:3, Deu 1:38, Deu 3:28; Joh 1:17 Geneva 159931:7 And Moses called unto Joshua, and said unto him in the sight of all Israel, Be strong and (c) of a good courage: for thou must go with this people unto the land which the LORD hath sworn unto their fathers to give them; and thou shalt cause them to inherit it.(c) For he that must govern the people, must be valiant to repress evil, and constant to maintain virtue. John Gill31:7 And Moses called unto Joshua,.... Who might be at some distance from him, with the tribe to which he belonged. The Targum of Jonathan adds,"out of the midst of the people:"and said unto him, in the sight of all Israel; now assembled together, and what follows was said in their hearing, to make him the more respectable to them: be strong and of a good courage; the same that is said to the people in Deut 31:6, and which was still more necessary in him, who was to be their general, and to go at the head of them, and lead them on to battle; and though Joshua was a man of courage and valour, as well as had military skill, as appears by his fight with Amalek, Ex 17:9; yet such an exhortation was not needless, seeing he had so much work to do, and so many enemies to contend with: for thou must go with this people unto the land which the Lord hath sworn unto their fathers to give them, and thou shalt cause them to inherit it; the Targum of Jonathan is,"which the Word of the Lord hath sworn to give;''the land of Canaan, thither he must go with them; this was the will and determination of God, and he must go alone without him, Moses, which would be a trial of his courage. |
|
31:831:8: Եւ Տէր որ երթալո՛ց է ընդ քեզ, ո՛չ թողցէ զքեզ, եւ ո՛չ ընդ վայր հարցէ. մի՛ երկնչիր եւ մի՛ զանգիտեր[2042]։[2042] Ոմանք. Եւ ո՛չ ընդ վայր հարկանիցէ։ Եւ Տէր որ երթալոց է [452]ընդ քեզ, ոչ թողցէ զքեզ եւ ոչ ընդ վայր հարցէ. մի՛ երկնչիր եւ մի՛ զանգիտեր:8 Քո առջեւից գնացող Տէրը չի լքելու եւ չի անտեսելու քեզ: Մի՛ երկնչիր, մի՛ վախեցիր»: 8 Եւ քու առջեւէդ գացողը նոյն ինքը Տէրն է. անիկա քեզի հետ պիտի ըլլայ. անիկա քեզ պիտի չթողու ու քեզ երեսէ պիտի չձգէ. մի՛ վախնար ու մի՛ զարհուրիր»։ 31:8: Եւ Տէր որ երթալո՛ց է ընդ քեզ, ո՛չ թողցէ զքեզ, եւ ո՛չ ընդ վայր հարցէ. մի՛ երկնչիր եւ մի՛ զանգիտեր[2042]։ [2042] Ոմանք. Եւ ո՛չ ընդ վայր հարկանիցէ։ 8 Քո առջեւից գնացող Տէրը չի լքելու եւ չի անտեսելու քեզ: Մի՛ երկնչիր, մի՛ վախեցիր»: 8 Եւ քու առջեւէդ գացողը նոյն ինքը Տէրն է. անիկա քեզի հետ պիտի ըլլայ. անիկա քեզ պիտի չթողու ու քեզ երեսէ պիտի չձգէ. մի՛ վախնար ու մի՛ զարհուրիր»։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:88: Господь Сам пойдет пред тобою, Сам будет с тобою, не отступит от тебя и не оставит тебя, не бойся и не ужасайся. And the LORD, he [it is] that doth go before thee; he will be with thee, he will not fail thee, neither forsake thee: fear not, neither be dismayed:31:8 καὶ και and; even κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the συμπορευόμενος συμπορευομαι converge; travel with μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your οὐκ ου not ἀνήσει ανιημι remiss; relax σε σε.1 you οὐδὲ ουδε not even; neither μὴ μη not ἐγκαταλίπῃ εγκαταλειπω abandon; leave behind σε σε.1 you μὴ μη not φοβοῦ φοβεω afraid; fear μηδὲ μηδε while not; nor δειλία δειλιαω intimidated 31:8 וַֽ wˈa וְ and יהוָ֞ה [yhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH ה֣וּא׀ hˈû הוּא he הַ ha הַ the הֹלֵ֣ךְ hōlˈēḵ הלך walk לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֗יךָ fānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face ה֚וּא ˈhû הוּא he יִהְיֶ֣ה yihyˈeh היה be עִמָּ֔ךְ ʕimmˈāḵ עִם with לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַרְפְּךָ֖ yarpᵊḵˌā רפה be slack וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֣א lˈō לֹא not יַֽעַזְבֶ֑ךָּ yˈaʕazᵊvˈekkā עזב leave לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תִירָ֖א ṯîrˌā ירא fear וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תֵחָֽת׃ ṯēḥˈāṯ חתת be terrified 31:8. et Dominus qui ductor vester est ipse erit tecum non dimittet nec derelinquet te noli timere nec paveasAnd the Lord who is your leader, he himself will be with thee: he will not leave thee, nor forsake thee: fear not, neither be dismayed. 8. And the LORD, he it is that doth go before thee; he will be with thee, he will not fail thee, neither forsake thee: fear not, neither be dismayed. 8: Господь Сам пойдет пред тобою, Сам будет с тобою, не отступит от тебя и не оставит тебя, не бойся и не ужасайся. 31:8 καὶ και and; even κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the συμπορευόμενος συμπορευομαι converge; travel with μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your οὐκ ου not ἀνήσει ανιημι remiss; relax σε σε.1 you οὐδὲ ουδε not even; neither μὴ μη not ἐγκαταλίπῃ εγκαταλειπω abandon; leave behind σε σε.1 you μὴ μη not φοβοῦ φοβεω afraid; fear μηδὲ μηδε while not; nor δειλία δειλιαω intimidated 31:8 וַֽ wˈa וְ and יהוָ֞ה [yhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH ה֣וּא׀ hˈû הוּא he הַ ha הַ the הֹלֵ֣ךְ hōlˈēḵ הלך walk לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנֶ֗יךָ fānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face ה֚וּא ˈhû הוּא he יִהְיֶ֣ה yihyˈeh היה be עִמָּ֔ךְ ʕimmˈāḵ עִם with לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not יַרְפְּךָ֖ yarpᵊḵˌā רפה be slack וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֣א lˈō לֹא not יַֽעַזְבֶ֑ךָּ yˈaʕazᵊvˈekkā עזב leave לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תִירָ֖א ṯîrˌā ירא fear וְ wᵊ וְ and לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תֵחָֽת׃ ṯēḥˈāṯ חתת be terrified 31:8. et Dominus qui ductor vester est ipse erit tecum non dimittet nec derelinquet te noli timere nec paveas ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the Lord who is your leader, he himself will be with thee: he will not leave thee, nor forsake thee: fear not, neither be dismayed. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:8: The Lord - doth go before thee - To prepare thy way, and to direct thee.He will be with thee - Accompany thee in all thy journeys, and assist thee in all thy enterprises. He will not fail thee - Thy expectation, however strong and extensive, shall never be disappointed: thou canst not expect too much from him. Neither forsake thee - He knows that without him thou canst do nothing, and therefore he will continue with thee, and in such a manner too that the excellence of the power shall appear to be of him, and not of man. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:8: he it is that: Deu 31:3, Deu 9:3; Exo 13:21, Exo 13:22, Exo 33:14he will be: Deu 31:6; Jos 1:5, Jos 1:9; Ch1 28:20; Isa 8:9, Isa 8:10, Isa 43:1, Isa 43:2; Rom 8:31 Geneva 159931:8 And the LORD, he [it is] that doth (d) go before thee; he will be with thee, he will not fail thee, neither forsake thee: fear not, neither be dismayed.(d) Signifying that man can never be of good courage, unless he is persuaded of God's favour and assistance. John Gill31:8 And the Lord, he it is that doth go before thee,.... The Word of the Lord, his Shechinah, according to the above Targum, and so in the next clause; the same that brought Israel out of Egypt, had gone before them in the wilderness, and now would go before Joshua and them into the land of Canaan:he will be with thee; to guide and direct, to assist and strengthen, to protect and defend, to give success to his arms, and victory over his enemies: he will not fail thee, neither forsake thee; not fail to give him counsel and direction, to afford him strength, and to fill him with courage, and to deliver his enemies into his hands; nor forsake him till he had finished the work he was to do, had made a complete conquest of the Canaanites, and settled the people of Israel in their land: fear not, neither be dismayed; at the number and strength of the enemy, nor at any difficulties that might lie in the way of finishing so great an undertaking, since the Lord would be with him; see Rom 8:31. |
|
31:931:9: Եւ գրեա՛ց Մովսէս զամենայն բանս օրինացս այսոցիկ ՚ի մատենի. եւ ետ զայն ցքահանայսն ցորդիսն Ղեւեայ, որ բառնայի՛ն զտապանակ ուխտին Տեառն, եւ ցծերս որդւոցն Իսրայէլի։ Եւ գրեաց Մովսէս [453]զամենայն բանս օրինացս այսոցիկ ի մատենի``, եւ ետ զայն ցքահանայսն, ցորդիսն Ղեւեայ, որ բառնային զտապանակ ուխտին Տեառն, եւ [454]ցծերս որդւոցն`` Իսրայելի:9 Մովսէսն այս օրէնքների բոլոր խօսքերը գրեց մատեանում, այն տուեց քահանաներին՝ Տիրոջ ուխտի տապանակը ուսամբարձ տանող Ղեւիի որդիներին եւ իսրայէլացի ծերերին: 9 Մովսէս այս օրէնքը գրեց եւ զանիկա Տէրոջը ուխտին տապանակը վերցնող Ղեւտացի քահանաներուն ու Իսրայէլի բոլոր ծերերուն տուաւ։ 31:9: Եւ գրեա՛ց Մովսէս զամենայն բանս օրինացս այսոցիկ ՚ի մատենի. եւ ետ զայն ցքահանայսն ցորդիսն Ղեւեայ, որ բառնայի՛ն զտապանակ ուխտին Տեառն, եւ ցծերս որդւոցն Իսրայէլի։ 9 Մովսէսն այս օրէնքների բոլոր խօսքերը գրեց մատեանում, այն տուեց քահանաներին՝ Տիրոջ ուխտի տապանակը ուսամբարձ տանող Ղեւիի որդիներին եւ իսրայէլացի ծերերին: 9 Մովսէս այս օրէնքը գրեց եւ զանիկա Տէրոջը ուխտին տապանակը վերցնող Ղեւտացի քահանաներուն ու Իսրայէլի բոլոր ծերերուն տուաւ։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:99: И написал Моисей закон сей, и отдал его священникам, сынам Левииным, носящим ковчег завета Господня, и всем старейшинам [сынов] Израилевых. And Moses wrote this law, and delivered it unto the priests the sons of Levi, which bare the ark of the covenant of the LORD, and unto all the elders of Israel:31:9 καὶ και and; even ἔγραψεν γραφω write Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs τὰ ο the ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for βιβλίον βιβλιον scroll καὶ και and; even ἔδωκεν διδωμι give; deposit τοῖς ο the ἱερεῦσιν ιερευς priest τοῖς ο the υἱοῖς υιος son Λευι λευι Leuΐ; Lei τοῖς ο the αἴρουσιν αιρω lift; remove τὴν ο the κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark τῆς ο the διαθήκης διαθηκη covenant κυρίου κυριος lord; master καὶ και and; even τοῖς ο the πρεσβυτέροις πρεσβυτερος senior; older τῶν ο the υἱῶν υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:9 וַ wa וְ and יִּכְתֹּ֣ב yyiḵtˈōv כתב write מֹשֶׁה֮ mōšeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָ֣ה ttôrˈā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּאת֒ zzōṯ זֹאת this וַֽ wˈa וְ and יִּתְּנָ֗הּ yyittᵊnˈāh נתן give אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הַ ha הַ the כֹּהֲנִים֙ kkōhᵃnîm כֹּהֵן priest בְּנֵ֣י bᵊnˈê בֵּן son לֵוִ֔י lēwˈî לֵוִי Levi הַ ha הַ the נֹּ֣שְׂאִ֔ים nnˈōśᵊʔˈîm נשׂא lift אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] אֲרֹ֖ון ʔᵃrˌôn אֲרֹון ark בְּרִ֣ית bᵊrˈîṯ בְּרִית covenant יְהוָ֑ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole זִקְנֵ֖י ziqnˌê זָקֵן old יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:9. scripsit itaque Moses legem hanc et tradidit eam sacerdotibus filiis Levi qui portabant arcam foederis Domini et cunctis senioribus IsrahelisAnd Moses wrote this law, and delivered it to the priests the sons of Levi, who carried the ark of the covenant of the Lord, and to all the ancients of Israel. 9. And Moses wrote this law, and delivered it unto the priests the sons of Levi, which bare the ark of the covenant of the LORD, and unto all the elders of Israel. 9: И написал Моисей закон сей, и отдал его священникам, сынам Левииным, носящим ковчег завета Господня, и всем старейшинам [сынов] Израилевых. 31:9 καὶ και and; even ἔγραψεν γραφω write Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs τὰ ο the ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for βιβλίον βιβλιον scroll καὶ και and; even ἔδωκεν διδωμι give; deposit τοῖς ο the ἱερεῦσιν ιερευς priest τοῖς ο the υἱοῖς υιος son Λευι λευι Leuΐ; Lei τοῖς ο the αἴρουσιν αιρω lift; remove τὴν ο the κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark τῆς ο the διαθήκης διαθηκη covenant κυρίου κυριος lord; master καὶ και and; even τοῖς ο the πρεσβυτέροις πρεσβυτερος senior; older τῶν ο the υἱῶν υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:9 וַ wa וְ and יִּכְתֹּ֣ב yyiḵtˈōv כתב write מֹשֶׁה֮ mōšeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָ֣ה ttôrˈā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּאת֒ zzōṯ זֹאת this וַֽ wˈa וְ and יִּתְּנָ֗הּ yyittᵊnˈāh נתן give אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הַ ha הַ the כֹּהֲנִים֙ kkōhᵃnîm כֹּהֵן priest בְּנֵ֣י bᵊnˈê בֵּן son לֵוִ֔י lēwˈî לֵוִי Levi הַ ha הַ the נֹּ֣שְׂאִ֔ים nnˈōśᵊʔˈîm נשׂא lift אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] אֲרֹ֖ון ʔᵃrˌôn אֲרֹון ark בְּרִ֣ית bᵊrˈîṯ בְּרִית covenant יְהוָ֑ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole זִקְנֵ֖י ziqnˌê זָקֵן old יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:9. scripsit itaque Moses legem hanc et tradidit eam sacerdotibus filiis Levi qui portabant arcam foederis Domini et cunctis senioribus Israhelis ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And Moses wrote this law, and delivered it to the priests the sons of Levi, who carried the ark of the covenant of the Lord, and to all the ancients of Israel. |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ mh▾ all ▾ Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 17069: The Reading of the Law.B. C. 1451.9 And Moses wrote this law, and delivered it unto the priests the sons of Levi, which bare the ark of the covenant of the LORD, and unto all the elders of Israel. 10 And Moses commanded them, saying, At the end of every seven years, in the solemnity of the year of release, in the feast of tabernacles, 11 When all Israel is come to appear before the LORD thy God in the place which he shall choose, thou shalt read this law before all Israel in their hearing. 12 Gather the people together, men, and women, and children, and thy stranger that is within thy gates, that they may hear, and that they may learn, and fear the LORD your God, and observe to do all the words of this law: 13 And that their children, which have not known any thing, may hear, and learn to fear the LORD your God, as long as ye live in the land whither ye go over Jordan to possess it. The law was given by Moses; so it is said, John i. 17. He was not only entrusted to deliver it to that generation, but to transmit it to the generations to come; and here it appears that he was faithful to that trust. I. Moses wrote this law, v. 9. The learned bishop Patrick understands this of all the five books of Moses, which are often called the law; he supposes that though Moses had written most of the Pentateuch before, yet he did not finish it till now; now he put his last hand to that sacred volume. Many think that the law here (especially since it is called this law, this grand abridgment of the law) is to be understood of this book of Deuteronomy; all those discourses to the people which have taken up this whole book, he, being in them divinely inspired, wrote them as the word of God. He wrote this law, 1. That those who had heard it might often review it themselves, and call it to mind. 2. That it might be the more safely handed down to posterity. Note, The church has received abundance of advantage from the writing, as well as from the preaching, of divine things; faith comes not only by hearing, but by reading. The same care that was taken of the law, thanks be to God, is taken of the gospel too; soon after it was preached it was written, that it might reach to those on whom the ends of the world shall come. II. Having written it, he committed it to the care and custody of the priests and elders. He delivered one authentic copy to the priests, to be laid up by the ark (v. 26), there to remain as a standard by which all other copies must be tried. And it is supposed that he gave another copy to the elders of each tribe, to be transcribed by all of that tribe that were so disposed. Some observe that the elders, as well as the priests, were entrusted with the law, to intimate that magistrates by the power, as well as ministers by their doctrine, are to maintain religion, and to take care that the law be not broken nor lost. III. He appointed the public reading of this law in a general assembly of all Israel every seventh year. The pious Jews (it is very probable) read the laws daily in their families, and Moses of old time was read in the synagogue every sabbath day, Acts xv. 21. But once in seven years, that the law might be the more magnified and made honourable, it must be read in a general assembly. Though we read the word in private, we must not think it needless to hear it read in public. Now here he give direction, 1. When this solemn reading of the law must be, that the time might add to the solemnity; it must be done, (1.) In the year of release. In that year the land rested, so that they could the better spare time to attend this service. Servants who were then discharged, and poor debtors who were then acquitted from their debts, must know that, having the benefit of the law, it was justly expected they should yield obedience to it, and therefore give up themselves to be God's servants, because he had loosed their bonds. The year of release was typical of gospel grace, which therefore is called the acceptable year of the Lord; for our remission and liberty by Christ engage us to keep his commandments, Luke i. 74, 75. (2.) At the feast of tabernacles in that year. In that feast they were particularly required to rejoice before God, Lev. xxiii. 40. Therefore then they must read the law, both to qualify their mirth and keep it in due bounds, and to sanctify their mirth, that they might make the law of God the matter of their rejoicing, and might read it with pleasure and not as a task. 2. To whom it must be read: To all Israel (v. 11), men, women, and children, and the strangers, v. 12. The women and children were not obliged to go up to the other feasts, but to this only in which the law was read. Note, It is the will of God that all people should acquaint themselves with his word. It is a rule to all, and therefore should be read to all. It is supposed that, since all Israel could not possibly meet in one place, nor could one man's voice reach them all, as many as the courts of the Lord's house would hold met there, and the rest at the same time in their synagogues. The Jewish doctors say that the hearers were bound to prepare their hearts, and to hear with fear and reverence, and with joy and trembling, as in the day when the law was given on Mount Sinai; and, though there were great and wise men who knew the whole law very well, yet they were bound to hear with great attention; for he that reads is the messenger of the congregation to cause the words of God to be heard. I wish those that hear the gospel read and preached would consider this. 3. By whom it must be read: Thou shalt read it (v. 11), "Thou, O Israel," by a proper person appointed for that purpose; or, "Thou, O Joshua," their chief ruler; accordingly we find that he did read the law himself, Josh. viii. 34, 35. So did Josiah, 2 Chron. xxxiv. 30, and Ezra, Neh. viii. 3. And the Jews say that the king himself (when they had one) was the person that read in the courts of the temple, that a pulpit was set up for that purpose in the midst of the court, in which the king stood, that the book of the law was delivered to him by the high priest, that he stood up to receive it, uttered a prayer (as every one did that was to read the law in public) before he read; and then, if he pleased, he might sit down and read. But if he read standing it was thought the more commendable, as (they say) king Agrippa did. Here let me offer it as a conjecture that Solomon is called the preacher, in his Ecclesiastes, because he delivered the substance of that book in a discourse to the people, after his public reading of the law in the feast of tabernacles, according to this appointment here. 4. For what end it must be thus solemnly read. (1.) That the present generation might hereby keep up their acquaintance with the law of God, v. 12. They must hear, that they may learn, and fear God, and observe to do their duty. See here what we are to aim at in hearing the word; we must hear, that we may learn and grow in knowledge; and every time we read the scriptures we shall find that there is still more and more to be learned out of them. We must learn, that we may fear God, that is, that we may be duly affected with divine things; and must fear God, that we may observe and do the words of his law; for in vain do we pretend to fear him if we do not obey him. (2.) That the rising generation might betimes be leavened with religion (v. 13); not only that those who know something may thus know more, but that the children who have not known any thing may betimes know this, how much it is their interest as well as duty to fear God. Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:9: Moses wrote this law - Not the whole Pentateuch, but either the discourses and precepts mentioned in the preceding chapters, or the book of Deuteronomy, which is most likely.Some of the rabbins have pretended that Moses wrote thirteen copies of the whole Pentateuch; that he gave one to each of the twelve tribes, and the thirteenth was laid up by the ark. This opinion deserves little credit. Some think that he wrote two copies, one of which he gave to the priests and Levites for general use, according to what is said in this verse, the other to be laid up beside the ark as a standard copy for reference, and to be a witness against the people should they break it or become idolatrous. This second copy is supposed to be intended Deu 31:26. As the law was properly a covenant or contract between God and the people, it is natural to suppose there were two copies of it, that each of the contracting parties might have one: therefore one was laid up beside the ark, this was the Lord's copy; another was given to the priests and Levites, this was the people's copy. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:9: Moses: Deu 31:22-24, Deu 31:28; Num 33:2; Dan 9:13; Mal 4:4; Mar 10:4, Mar 10:5, Mar 12:19; Luk 20:28; Joh 1:17, Joh 1:45, Joh 5:46delivered: Deu 31:24-26, Deu 17:18 the priests: Hos 4:6; Mal 2:7 which bare: Num 4:15; Jos 3:3, Jos 3:14-17, Jos 6:12; Kg1 8:3; Ch1 15:2, Ch1 15:12-15 John Gill31:9 And Moses wrote this law,.... The book of Deuteronomy, or the Pentateuch, the five books of Moses, which he had now finished, and which all of them together are sometimes called the law, Gal 4:21,and delivered it unto the priests, the sons of Levi; who were the teachers of the law, as Aben Ezra observes; see Mal 2:7; and therefore it was proper to put it into their hands, to instruct the people in it, and that the people might apply to them in any matter of difficulty, or when they wanted to have any particular law explained to them: which bare the ark of the covenant of the Lord; for though they were the Levites, and particularly the Kohathites, who in journeying carried the ark; see Num 4:5; yet sometimes it was borne by the priests; see Josh 3:13, and unto all the elders of Israel; the judges and civil magistrates in the respective tribes; for as there were in the book of the law several things which belonged to the priests to perform, and all of them they were to instruct in, so there were others which were to be the rule of judgment to judges, and all civil magistrates, and which they were to take care were put in execution; and therefore it was proper that they should have a copy of this law, and which must be here understood; for it cannot be thought that one and the same copy should be given both to the priests and to all the elders. The Jews say Moses wrote thirteen copies of the law, twelve for the twelve tribes, and one to be put into the ark, to convict of fraud or corruption, should any be made (s). (s) Debarim Rabba, sect. 9. fol. 244. 2. John Wesley31:9 This law - Largely so called, the whole law or doctrine delivered unto Moses contained in these five books. To the priests - That they might keep it carefully and religiously, and bring it forth upon occasion, and read it, and instruct the people out of it. The elders - Who were assistants to the priests, to take care that the law should be kept, and read, and observed.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:9 HE DELIVERS THE LAW TO THE PRIESTS, TO READ IT EVERY SEVENTH YEAR TO THE PEOPLE. (Deut 31:9-13)And Moses wrote this law, and delivered it unto the priests--The law thus committed to writing was either the whole book of Deuteronomy, or the important part of it contained between the twenty-seventh and thirtieth chapters. It was usual in cases of public or private contract for two copies of the engagement to be made--one to be deposited in the national archives or some secure place for reference, should occasion require. The other was to remain in the hands of the contracting parties (Jer 32:12-14). The same course was followed on this renewal of the covenant between God and Israel. Two written copies of the law were prepared, the one of which was delivered to the public representatives of Israel; namely, the priests and the elders. the priests, . . . who bare the ark of the covenant--In all ordinary journeys, it was the common duty of the Levites to carry the ark and its furniture (Num 4:15); but, on solemn or extraordinary occasions, that office was discharged by the priests (Josh 3:3-8; Josh 6:6; 1Chron 15:11-12). all the elders of Israel--They were assistants to the priests and overseers to take care of the preservation, rehearsal, and observance of the law. |
|
31:1031:10: Եւ պատուիրեա՛ց նոցա Մովսէս յաւուր յայնմիկ եւ ասէ. Յետ եւթն ամի ժամանակի տարւոյն թողութեան ՚ի տօնի տաղաւարահարացն, եւ պատուիրեաց նոցա Մովսէս [455]յաւուր յայնմիկ`` եւ ասէ. Յետ եւթն ամի ժամանակի տարւոյն թողութեան ի տօնի տաղաւարահարացն:10 Մովսէսն այդ օրը նրանց պատուիրելով՝ ասաց. «Եօթը տարի յետոյ՝ թողութեան տարում, Տաղաւարահարաց տօնին, 10 Մովսէս անոնց պատուիրեց. «Ամէն եօթներորդ տարին, թողութեան տարիին ատենը, տաղաւարահարաց տօնին, 31:10: Եւ պատուիրեա՛ց նոցա Մովսէս յաւուր յայնմիկ եւ ասէ. Յետ եւթն ամի ժամանակի տարւոյն թողութեան ՚ի տօնի տաղաւարահարացն, 10 Մովսէսն այդ օրը նրանց պատուիրելով՝ ասաց. «Եօթը տարի յետոյ՝ թողութեան տարում, Տաղաւարահարաց տօնին, 10 Մովսէս անոնց պատուիրեց. «Ամէն եօթներորդ տարին, թողութեան տարիին ատենը, տաղաւարահարաց տօնին, zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1010: И завещал им Моисей и сказал: по прошествии семи лет, в год отпущения, в праздник кущей, And Moses commanded them, saying, At the end of [every] seven years, in the solemnity of the year of release, in the feast of tabernacles:31:10 καὶ και and; even ἐνετείλατο εντελλομαι direct; enjoin αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that λέγων λεγω tell; declare μετὰ μετα with; amid ἑπτὰ επτα seven ἔτη ετος year ἐν εν in καιρῷ καιρος season; opportunity ἐνιαυτοῦ ενιαυτος cycle; period ἀφέσεως αφεσις dismissal; forgiveness ἐν εν in ἑορτῇ εορτη festival; feast σκηνοπηγίας σκηνοπηγια Booths 31:10 וַ wa וְ and יְצַ֥ו yᵊṣˌaw צוה command מֹשֶׁ֖ה mōšˌeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֹותָ֣ם ʔôṯˈām אֵת [object marker] לֵ lē לְ to אמֹ֑ר ʔmˈōr אמר say מִ mi מִן from קֵּ֣ץ׀ qqˈēṣ קֵץ end שֶׁ֣בַע šˈevaʕ שֶׁבַע seven שָׁנִ֗ים šānˈîm שָׁנָה year בְּ bᵊ בְּ in מֹעֵ֛ד mōʕˈēḏ מֹועֵד appointment שְׁנַ֥ת šᵊnˌaṯ שָׁנָה year הַ ha הַ the שְּׁמִטָּ֖ה ššᵊmiṭṭˌā שְׁמִטָּה remitting בְּ bᵊ בְּ in חַ֥ג ḥˌaḡ חַג festival הַ ha הַ the סֻּכֹּֽות׃ ssukkˈôṯ סֻכָּה cover of foliage 31:10. praecepitque eis dicens post septem annos anno remissionis in sollemnitate tabernaculorumAnd he commanded them, saying: After seven years, in the year of remission, in the feast of tabernacles, 10. And Moses commanded them, saying, At the end of seven years, in the set time of the year of release, in the feast of tabernacles, 10: И завещал им Моисей и сказал: по прошествии семи лет, в год отпущения, в праздник кущей, 31:10 καὶ και and; even ἐνετείλατο εντελλομαι direct; enjoin αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that λέγων λεγω tell; declare μετὰ μετα with; amid ἑπτὰ επτα seven ἔτη ετος year ἐν εν in καιρῷ καιρος season; opportunity ἐνιαυτοῦ ενιαυτος cycle; period ἀφέσεως αφεσις dismissal; forgiveness ἐν εν in ἑορτῇ εορτη festival; feast σκηνοπηγίας σκηνοπηγια Booths 31:10 וַ wa וְ and יְצַ֥ו yᵊṣˌaw צוה command מֹשֶׁ֖ה mōšˌeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֹותָ֣ם ʔôṯˈām אֵת [object marker] לֵ lē לְ to אמֹ֑ר ʔmˈōr אמר say מִ mi מִן from קֵּ֣ץ׀ qqˈēṣ קֵץ end שֶׁ֣בַע šˈevaʕ שֶׁבַע seven שָׁנִ֗ים šānˈîm שָׁנָה year בְּ bᵊ בְּ in מֹעֵ֛ד mōʕˈēḏ מֹועֵד appointment שְׁנַ֥ת šᵊnˌaṯ שָׁנָה year הַ ha הַ the שְּׁמִטָּ֖ה ššᵊmiṭṭˌā שְׁמִטָּה remitting בְּ bᵊ בְּ in חַ֥ג ḥˌaḡ חַג festival הַ ha הַ the סֻּכֹּֽות׃ ssukkˈôṯ סֻכָּה cover of foliage 31:10. praecepitque eis dicens post septem annos anno remissionis in sollemnitate tabernaculorum ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And he commanded them, saying: After seven years, in the year of remission, in the feast of tabernacles, |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-191410: «В год отпущения», т. е. в субботний год. См. пр. к 1–11: ст. XV гл. кн. Втор. О празднике кущей см. Исх ХХIII:16; XXIII:33–36, 39–43; Чис XXIX:12–38.Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:10: At the end of every seven years - thou shalt read this law - Every seventh year was a year of release, Deu 15:1, at which time the people's minds, being under a peculiar degree of solemnity, were better disposed to hear and profit by the words of God. I suppose on this ground also that the whole book of Deuteronomy is meant, as it alone contains an epitome of the whole Pentateuch. And in this way some of the chief Jewish rabbins understand this place.It is strange that this commandment, relative to a public reading of the law every seven years, should have been rarely attended to. It does not appear that from the time mentioned Jos 8:30, at which time this public reading first took place, till the reign of Jehoshaphat Ch2 17:7, there was any public seventh year reading - a period of 530 years. The next seventh year reading was not till the eighteenth year of the reign of Josiah, Ch2 34:30, a space of two hundred and eighty-two years. Nor do we find any other publicly mentioned from this time till the return from the Babylonish captivity, Neh 8:2. Nor is there any other on record from that time to the destruction of Jerusalem. See Dodd. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:10: Deu 15:1, Deu 15:2; Lev 23:34-43John Gill31:10 And Moses commanded them,.... The priests and the elders, to whom the law was delivered:saying; as follows: at the end of every seven years; every seventh year was a year of rest to the land, and of remission of debts to poor debtors: at the close of this year or going out of it, according to the Misnah (t), even on the eighth year coming in, the following was to be done, namely, the reading of the law; and so Jarchi interprets it of the first year of release, the eighth, that is, the first year after the year of release; but Aben Ezra better interprets it of the beginning of the seventh year; for as he elsewhere observes on Deut 15:1; the word signifies the extremity of the year, and there are two extremities of it, the beginning and the end, and the first extremity is meant; which is more likely than that the reading of the law should be put off to the end of the year, and which seems to be confirmed by what follows: in the solemnity of the year of release, in the feast of tabernacles, or "in the appointed time" (u); of the year of release, of the release of debtors from their debts, Deut 15:1; when the time or season appointed and fixed was come: moreover, what is here directed to being to be done at the feast of tabernacles, shows it to be at the beginning of the year, since that feast was in the month Tisri, which was originally the beginning of the year, before the coming of the children of Israel out of Egypt, and still continued so for many things, and particularly for the years of release (w); and this was a very proper time for the reading of the law, when all the increase of the earth and fruits thereof were gathered in; and so their hearts filled, or at least should be, with gladness and gratitude; and when there was no tillage of the land, being the seventh year, and so were at leisure for such service; and when all poor debtors were released from their debts, and so were freed from all cares and troubles, and could better attend unto it. (t) Sotah, c. 7. sect. 8. (u) "in tempore statuto", Pagninus, Montanus: stato tempor. Junius & Tremellius, Piscator. (w) Misn. Roshhashanah, c. 1. sect. 1. John Wesley31:10 The year of release - When they were freed from debts and troubles, and cares of worldly matters, and thereby fitter to attend on God and his service.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:10 At the end of every seven years, . . . thou shalt read this law--At the return of the sabbatic year and during the feast of tabernacles, the law was to be publicly read. This order of Moses was a future and prospective arrangement; for the observance of the sabbatic year did not commence till the conquest and peaceful occupation of Canaan. The ordinance served several important purposes. For, while the people had opportunities of being instructed in the law every Sabbath and daily in their own homes, this public periodical rehearsal at meetings in the courts of the sanctuary, where women and children of twelve years were present (as they usually were at the great festivals), was calculated to produce good and pious impressions of divine truth amid the sacred associations of the time and place. Besides, it formed a public guarantee for the preservation, integrity, and faithful transmission of the Sacred Book to successive ages. |
|
31:1131:11: ՚ի գումարել ամենայն Իսրայէլի յանդիման լինելոյ առաջի Տեառն Աստուծոյ քոյ, ՚ի տեղւոջն զոր ընտրեսցէ Տէր ընթեռնուցո՛ւք զօրէնս զայս առաջի Իսրայէլի յականջս նոցա[2043], [2043] Ոմանք. Յանդիման լինելով առաջի։ ի գումարել ամենայն Իսրայելի յանդիման լինելոյ առաջի Տեառն Աստուծոյ քո ի տեղւոջն զոր ընտրեսցէ Տէր, ընթեռնուցուք զօրէնս զայս առաջի [456]Իսրայելի յականջս նոցա:11 երբ ամբողջ Իսրայէլը հաւաքուի, որպէսզի Տիրոջ ընտրած վայրում հանդիպէք ձեր Տէր Աստծուն, այս օրէնքները կը կարդաք իսրայէլացիների առջեւ, նրանց ականջին, 11 Երբ բոլոր Իսրայէլ կու գայ քու Տէր Աստուծոյդ առջեւ երեւնալու անոր ընտրած տեղը այն ատեն բոլոր Իսրայէլին առջեւ այս օրէնքը պիտի կարդաք*, որպէս զի լսեն։ 31:11: ՚ի գումարել ամենայն Իսրայէլի յանդիման լինելոյ առաջի Տեառն Աստուծոյ քոյ, ՚ի տեղւոջն զոր ընտրեսցէ Տէր ընթեռնուցո՛ւք զօրէնս զայս առաջի Իսրայէլի յականջս նոցա[2043], [2043] Ոմանք. Յանդիման լինելով առաջի։ 11 երբ ամբողջ Իսրայէլը հաւաքուի, որպէսզի Տիրոջ ընտրած վայրում հանդիպէք ձեր Տէր Աստծուն, այս օրէնքները կը կարդաք իսրայէլացիների առջեւ, նրանց ականջին, 11 Երբ բոլոր Իսրայէլ կու գայ քու Տէր Աստուծոյդ առջեւ երեւնալու անոր ընտրած տեղը այն ատեն բոլոր Իսրայէլին առջեւ այս օրէնքը պիտի կարդաք*, որպէս զի լսեն։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1111: когда весь Израиль придет явиться пред лице Господа Бога твоего на место, которое изберет [Господь], читай сей закон пред всем Израилем вслух его; When all Israel is come to appear before the LORD thy God in the place which he shall choose, thou shalt read this law before all Israel in their hearing:31:11 ἐν εν in τῷ ο the συμπορεύεσθαι συμπορευομαι converge; travel with πάντα πας all; every Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ὀφθῆναι οραω view; see ἐνώπιον ενωπιος in the face; facing κυρίου κυριος lord; master τοῦ ο the θεοῦ θεος God σου σου of you; your ἐν εν in τῷ ο the τόπῳ τοπος place; locality ᾧ ος who; what ἂν αν perhaps; ever ἐκλέξηται εκλεγω select; choose κύριος κυριος lord; master ἀναγνώσεσθε αναγινωσκω read τὸν ο the νόμον νομος.1 law τοῦτον ουτος this; he ἐναντίον εναντιον next to; before παντὸς πας all; every Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel εἰς εις into; for τὰ ο the ὦτα ους ear αὐτῶν αυτος he; him 31:11 בְּ bᵊ בְּ in בֹ֣וא vˈô בוא come כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel לֵ lē לְ to רָאֹות֙ rāʔôṯ ראה see אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת together with פְּנֵי֙ pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֶ֔יךָ ʔᵉlōhˈeʸḵā אֱלֹהִים god(s) בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the מָּקֹ֖ום mmāqˌôm מָקֹום place אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] יִבְחָ֑ר yivḥˈār בחר examine תִּקְרָ֞א tiqrˈā קרא call אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָ֥ה ttôrˌā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֛את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this נֶ֥גֶד nˌeḡeḏ נֶגֶד counterpart כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל yiśrāʔˌēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אָזְנֵיהֶֽם׃ ʔoznêhˈem אֹזֶן ear 31:11. convenientibus cunctis ex Israhel ut appareant in conspectu Domini Dei tui in loco quem elegerit Dominus leges verba legis huius coram omni Israhel audientibus eisWhen all Israel come together, to appear in the sight of the Lord thy God in the place which the Lord shall choose, thou shalt read the words of this law before all Israel, in their hearing. 11. when all Israel is come to appear before the LORD thy God in the place which he shall choose, thou shalt read this law before all Israel in their hearing. 11: когда весь Израиль придет явиться пред лице Господа Бога твоего на место, которое изберет [Господь], читай сей закон пред всем Израилем вслух его; 31:11 ἐν εν in τῷ ο the συμπορεύεσθαι συμπορευομαι converge; travel with πάντα πας all; every Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ὀφθῆναι οραω view; see ἐνώπιον ενωπιος in the face; facing κυρίου κυριος lord; master τοῦ ο the θεοῦ θεος God σου σου of you; your ἐν εν in τῷ ο the τόπῳ τοπος place; locality ᾧ ος who; what ἂν αν perhaps; ever ἐκλέξηται εκλεγω select; choose κύριος κυριος lord; master ἀναγνώσεσθε αναγινωσκω read τὸν ο the νόμον νομος.1 law τοῦτον ουτος this; he ἐναντίον εναντιον next to; before παντὸς πας all; every Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel εἰς εις into; for τὰ ο the ὦτα ους ear αὐτῶν αυτος he; him 31:11 בְּ bᵊ בְּ in בֹ֣וא vˈô בוא come כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel לֵ lē לְ to רָאֹות֙ rāʔôṯ ראה see אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת together with פְּנֵי֙ pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֶ֔יךָ ʔᵉlōhˈeʸḵā אֱלֹהִים god(s) בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the מָּקֹ֖ום mmāqˌôm מָקֹום place אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] יִבְחָ֑ר yivḥˈār בחר examine תִּקְרָ֞א tiqrˈā קרא call אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָ֥ה ttôrˌā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֛את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this נֶ֥גֶד nˌeḡeḏ נֶגֶד counterpart כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל yiśrāʔˌēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אָזְנֵיהֶֽם׃ ʔoznêhˈem אֹזֶן ear 31:11. convenientibus cunctis ex Israhel ut appareant in conspectu Domini Dei tui in loco quem elegerit Dominus leges verba legis huius coram omni Israhel audientibus eis ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ When all Israel come together, to appear in the sight of the Lord thy God in the place which the Lord shall choose, thou shalt read the words of this law before all Israel, in their hearing. |
jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾ Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:11: Compare the marginal references. It is not to be supposed that the whole of the Pentateuch was read, nor does the letter of the command require that it should be so. This reading could not be primarily designed for the information and instruction of the people, since it only took place once in seven years; but was evidently a symbolic transaction, intended, as were so many others, to impress on the people the conditions on which they held possession of their privileges and blessings.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:11: to appear: Deu 16:16, Deu 16:17; Exo 23:16, Exo 23:17, Exo 34:24; Psa 84:7in the place: Deu 12:5 shalt read: Jos 8:34, Jos 8:35; Kg2 23:2; Neh 8:1-8, Neh 8:13, Neh 8:18, Neh 9:3; Luk 4:16, Luk 4:17; Act 13:15; Act 15:21 Geneva 159931:11 When all Israel is come to appear (e) before the LORD thy God in the place which he shall choose, thou shalt read this law before all Israel in their hearing.(e) Before the Ark of the covenant, which was the sign of God's presence, and the figure of Christ. John Gill31:11 When all Israel is come to appear before the Lord thy God,.... As all the males were obliged to do three times in the year, and one of those times was the feast of tabernacles, and so a proper season for the reading of the law; see Ex 23:14;in the place which the Lord shall choose; the city of Jerusalem, and the temple there: thou shall read this law before all Israel in their hearing; the book of Deuteronomy, as Jarchi, or it may be the whole Pentateuch: who were to read it is not expressly said; the speech seems to be directed to the priests and elders, to whom the law written by Moses was delivered, Deut 31:9; and who were either to read it themselves, or take care that it should be read. Josephus (x) ascribes this service to the high priest; he says, standing in an high pulpit (or on an high bench),"from whence he may be heard, he must read the laws to all;''but the Jewish writers commonly allot this work to the king, or supreme governor, who at least was to read some parts of it; so Jarchi says, the king at first read Deuteronomy, as it is said in the Misnah (y);"he read from the beginning of Deuteronomy to Deut 6:4; hear, O Israel, &c. and then added Deut 11:13; then Deut 14:22; after that Deut 26:12; then the section of the king, Deut 17:14; next the blessings and the curses, Deut 27:15, with which he finished the whole section;''and so we find that Joshua, the governor of the people after Moses, read all his laws, Josh 8:35; and so did King Josiah at the finding of the book of the law, 4Kings 23:2, and Ezra, Neh 8:3. The king received the book from the high priest standing, and read it sitting; but King Agrippa stood and read, for which he was praised. (x) Antiqu. l. 4. c. 8. sect. 12. (y) Sotah, ut supra. (c. 7. sect. 8.) John Wesley31:11 Thou shalt read - Thou shalt cause it to be read by the priest or Levites; for he could not read it himself in the hearing of all Israel, but this was to be done by several persons, and so the people met in several congregations. |
|
31:1231:12: եկեղեցուցեալ զժողվուրդն, զա՛րս եւ զկանայս եւ զմանկունս, եւ զեկն որ ՚ի քաղաքս ձեր. զի լուիցեն, եւ ուսանիցին երկնչե՛լ ՚ի Տեառնէ Աստուծոյ մերմէ. եւ ուսցին առնե՛լ զամենայն պատգամս օրինացս այսոցիկ։ եկեղեցուցեալ զժողովուրդն, զարս եւ զկանայս եւ զմանկունս, եւ զեկն որ ի քաղաքս ձեր. զի լուիցեն եւ ուսանիցին երկնչել ի Տեառնէ Աստուծոյ [457]մերմէ, եւ ուսցին առնել`` զամենայն պատգամս օրինացս այսոցիկ:12 երբ ժողովուրդը՝ տղամարդիկ, կանայք, երեխաներն ու ձեր քաղաքներում գտնուող եկուորները հաւաքուած կը լինեն, որպէսզի լսեն ու սովորեն երկնչել մեր Տէր Աստծուց եւ սովորեն կատարել այս օրէնքի բոլոր պատգամները: 12 Հաւաքեցէք* ժողովուրդը՝ այրերը, կիները, տղաքներն ու քաղաքներուդ մէջ եղող օտարականները, որպէս զի լսեն եւ սորվելով՝ ձեր Տէր Աստուծմէն վախնան ու այս օրէնքին բոլոր խօսքերը պահեն ու կատարեն։ 31:12: եկեղեցուցեալ զժողվուրդն, զա՛րս եւ զկանայս եւ զմանկունս, եւ զեկն որ ՚ի քաղաքս ձեր. զի լուիցեն, եւ ուսանիցին երկնչե՛լ ՚ի Տեառնէ Աստուծոյ մերմէ. եւ ուսցին առնե՛լ զամենայն պատգամս օրինացս այսոցիկ։ 12 երբ ժողովուրդը՝ տղամարդիկ, կանայք, երեխաներն ու ձեր քաղաքներում գտնուող եկուորները հաւաքուած կը լինեն, որպէսզի լսեն ու սովորեն երկնչել մեր Տէր Աստծուց եւ սովորեն կատարել այս օրէնքի բոլոր պատգամները: 12 Հաւաքեցէք* ժողովուրդը՝ այրերը, կիները, տղաքներն ու քաղաքներուդ մէջ եղող օտարականները, որպէս զի լսեն եւ սորվելով՝ ձեր Տէր Աստուծմէն վախնան ու այս օրէնքին բոլոր խօսքերը պահեն ու կատարեն։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1212: собери народ, мужей и жен, и детей, и пришельцев твоих, которые будут в жилищах твоих, чтоб они слушали и учились, и чтобы боялись Господа Бога вашего, и старались исполнять все слова закона сего; Gather the people together, men, and women, and children, and thy stranger that [is] within thy gates, that they may hear, and that they may learn, and fear the LORD your God, and observe to do all the words of this law:31:12 ἐκκλησιάσας εκκλησιαζω the λαόν λαος populace; population τοὺς ο the ἄνδρας ανηρ man; husband καὶ και and; even τὰς ο the γυναῖκας γυνη woman; wife καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the ἔκγονα εκγονος descendant καὶ και and; even τὸν ο the προσήλυτον προσηλυτος proselyte τὸν ο the ἐν εν in ταῖς ο the πόλεσιν πολις city ὑμῶν υμων your ἵνα ινα so; that ἀκούσωσιν ακουω hear καὶ και and; even ἵνα ινα so; that μάθωσιν μανθανω learn φοβεῖσθαι φοβεω afraid; fear κύριον κυριος lord; master τὸν ο the θεὸν θεος God ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even ἀκούσονται ακουω hear ποιεῖν ποιεω do; make πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he 31:12 הַקְהֵ֣ל haqhˈēl קהל assemble אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the עָ֗ם ʕˈām עַם people הָֽ hˈā הַ the אֲנָשִׁ֤ים ʔᵃnāšˈîm אִישׁ man וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the נָּשִׁים֙ nnāšîm אִשָּׁה woman וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the טַּ֔ף ṭṭˈaf טַף [those unable to march] וְ wᵊ וְ and גֵרְךָ֖ ḡērᵊḵˌā גֵּר sojourner אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] בִּ bi בְּ in שְׁעָרֶ֑יךָ šᵊʕārˈeʸḵā שַׁעַר gate לְמַ֨עַן lᵊmˌaʕan לְמַעַן because of יִשְׁמְע֜וּ yišmᵊʕˈû שׁמע hear וּ û וְ and לְמַ֣עַן lᵊmˈaʕan לְמַעַן because of יִלְמְד֗וּ yilmᵊḏˈû למד learn וְ wᵊ וְ and יָֽרְאוּ֙ yˈārᵊʔû ירא fear אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹֽהֵיכֶ֔ם ʔᵉlˈōhêḵˈem אֱלֹהִים god(s) וְ wᵊ וְ and שָֽׁמְר֣וּ šˈāmᵊrˈû שׁמר keep לַ la לְ to עֲשֹׂ֔ות ʕᵃśˈôṯ עשׂה make אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole דִּבְרֵ֖י divrˌê דָּבָר word הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָ֥ה ttôrˌā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּֽאת׃ zzˈōṯ זֹאת this 31:12. et in unum omni populo congregato tam viris quam mulieribus parvulis et advenis qui sunt intra portas tuas ut audientes discant et timeant Dominum Deum vestrum et custodiant impleantque omnes sermones legis huiusAnd the people being all assembled together, both men and women, children and strangers, that are within thy gates: that hearing they may learn, and fear the Lord your God, and keep, and fulfil all the words of this law: 12. Assemble the people, the men and the women and the little ones, and thy stranger that is within thy gates, that they may hear, and that they may learn, and fear the LORD your God, and observe to do all the words of this law; 12: собери народ, мужей и жен, и детей, и пришельцев твоих, которые будут в жилищах твоих, чтоб они слушали и учились, и чтобы боялись Господа Бога вашего, и старались исполнять все слова закона сего; 31:12 ἐκκλησιάσας εκκλησιαζω the λαόν λαος populace; population τοὺς ο the ἄνδρας ανηρ man; husband καὶ και and; even τὰς ο the γυναῖκας γυνη woman; wife καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the ἔκγονα εκγονος descendant καὶ και and; even τὸν ο the προσήλυτον προσηλυτος proselyte τὸν ο the ἐν εν in ταῖς ο the πόλεσιν πολις city ὑμῶν υμων your ἵνα ινα so; that ἀκούσωσιν ακουω hear καὶ και and; even ἵνα ινα so; that μάθωσιν μανθανω learn φοβεῖσθαι φοβεω afraid; fear κύριον κυριος lord; master τὸν ο the θεὸν θεος God ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even ἀκούσονται ακουω hear ποιεῖν ποιεω do; make πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he 31:12 הַקְהֵ֣ל haqhˈēl קהל assemble אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the עָ֗ם ʕˈām עַם people הָֽ hˈā הַ the אֲנָשִׁ֤ים ʔᵃnāšˈîm אִישׁ man וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the נָּשִׁים֙ nnāšîm אִשָּׁה woman וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the טַּ֔ף ṭṭˈaf טַף [those unable to march] וְ wᵊ וְ and גֵרְךָ֖ ḡērᵊḵˌā גֵּר sojourner אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] בִּ bi בְּ in שְׁעָרֶ֑יךָ šᵊʕārˈeʸḵā שַׁעַר gate לְמַ֨עַן lᵊmˌaʕan לְמַעַן because of יִשְׁמְע֜וּ yišmᵊʕˈû שׁמע hear וּ û וְ and לְמַ֣עַן lᵊmˈaʕan לְמַעַן because of יִלְמְד֗וּ yilmᵊḏˈû למד learn וְ wᵊ וְ and יָֽרְאוּ֙ yˈārᵊʔû ירא fear אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹֽהֵיכֶ֔ם ʔᵉlˈōhêḵˈem אֱלֹהִים god(s) וְ wᵊ וְ and שָֽׁמְר֣וּ šˈāmᵊrˈû שׁמר keep לַ la לְ to עֲשֹׂ֔ות ʕᵃśˈôṯ עשׂה make אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole דִּבְרֵ֖י divrˌê דָּבָר word הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָ֥ה ttôrˌā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּֽאת׃ zzˈōṯ זֹאת this 31:12. et in unum omni populo congregato tam viris quam mulieribus parvulis et advenis qui sunt intra portas tuas ut audientes discant et timeant Dominum Deum vestrum et custodiant impleantque omnes sermones legis huius ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the people being all assembled together, both men and women, children and strangers, that are within thy gates: that hearing they may learn, and fear the Lord your God, and keep, and fulfil all the words of this law: |
jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:12: Gather: Deu 4:10men: Deu 6:6, Deu 6:7; Ezr 10:1; Psa 19:7-11; Joh 5:39; Ti2 3:15-17 that they may: Deu 29:29; Psa 34:11-14 John Gill31:12 Gather the people together, men, and women, and children,.... At the three grand festivals in other years, only males were obliged to appear; women might if they would, but they were not bound to it; but at this time all of every age and sex were to be summoned and assembled together; and it is said (z), when the king read in the book of the law, all the people were obliged to come and bring their families, as it is said Deut 31:12; "gather the people", &c. and as it could not be done when it happened on the sabbath day, the reading of the section was put off to the day following:and thy stranger that is within thy gates; not only the proselyte of righteousness, but the proselyte of the gate that renounced idolatry, for his further conviction and thorough conversion to the religion of the true God; or, as the Targum of Jonathan expresses it, that they might see the honour and glory of the law. The end is more fully expressed as follows: that they may hear; all the laws which God had given: and that they may learn; and attain unto the true knowledge and right understanding of them: and fear the Lord your God; serve and worship him internally and externally, according to these laws: and observe to do all the words of this law; so take notice of them as to put them in practice; and reading them in such a solemn and reverent manner made them the more servable, and raised the greater attention to them, to the importance of them; otherwise they were read in their families, and on sabbath days in their synagogues; see Deut 6:7 Acts 13:15. (z) Bartenora in Misn. Megillah, c. 1. sect. 3. John Wesley31:12 Together - Not in one place. But into divers assemblies or synagogues. Women who hereby are required to go to Jerusalem at this solemnity, as they were permitted to do in other solemnities. Children - Such of them as could understand, as appears from Neh 8:2-3, the pious Jews doubtless read it daily in their houses, and Moses of old time was read in the synagogues every sabbath day. But once in seven years, the law was thus to be read in public, to magnify it and make it honourable. |
|
31:1331:13: Եւ որդիք նոցա որ ո՛չ գիտիցեն, լուիցե՛ն եւ ուսցին երկնչե՛լ ՚ի Տեառնէ Աստուծոյ մերմէ զամենայն աւուրս՝ որչափ եւ կեցցեն նոքա ՚ի վերայ երկրին՝ յոր դուք անցանելոց էք ընդ Յորդանան ժառանգել զնա։ եւ որդիք նոցա որ ոչ գիտիցեն` լուիցեն եւ ուսցին երկնչել ի Տեառնէ Աստուծոյ [458]մերմէ զամենայն աւուրս որչափ եւ կեցցեն նոքա`` ի վերայ երկրին յոր դուք անցանելոց էք ընդ Յորդանան ժառանգել զնա:13 Նրանց անտեղեակ որդիները թող լսեն ու սովորեն երկնչել մեր Տէր Աստծուց այդ երկրում ապրելու բոլոր օրերին, այն երկրում, որ Յորդանան գետով անցնելով՝ պիտի ժառանգէք դուք»: 13 Անոնց չգիտցող տղաքները լսելով՝ ձեր Տէր Աստուծմէն վախնալ սորվին, բոլոր այն օրերուն մէջ որչափ որ պիտի ապրիք այն երկրին վրայ, որ ժառանգելու համար Յորդանանէն պիտի անցնիք»։ 31:13: Եւ որդիք նոցա որ ո՛չ գիտիցեն, լուիցե՛ն եւ ուսցին երկնչե՛լ ՚ի Տեառնէ Աստուծոյ մերմէ զամենայն աւուրս՝ որչափ եւ կեցցեն նոքա ՚ի վերայ երկրին՝ յոր դուք անցանելոց էք ընդ Յորդանան ժառանգել զնա։ 13 Նրանց անտեղեակ որդիները թող լսեն ու սովորեն երկնչել մեր Տէր Աստծուց այդ երկրում ապրելու բոլոր օրերին, այն երկրում, որ Յորդանան գետով անցնելով՝ պիտի ժառանգէք դուք»: 13 Անոնց չգիտցող տղաքները լսելով՝ ձեր Տէր Աստուծմէն վախնալ սորվին, բոլոր այն օրերուն մէջ որչափ որ պիտի ապրիք այն երկրին վրայ, որ ժառանգելու համար Յորդանանէն պիտի անցնիք»։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1313: и сыны их, которые не знают [сего], услышат и научатся бояться Господа Бога вашего во все дни, доколе вы будете жить на земле, в которую вы переходите за Иордан, чтоб овладеть ею. And [that] their children, which have not known [any thing], may hear, and learn to fear the LORD your God, as long as ye live in the land whither ye go over Jordan to possess it:31:13 καὶ και and; even οἱ ο the υἱοὶ υιος son αὐτῶν αυτος he; him οἳ ος who; what οὐκ ου not οἴδασιν οιδα aware ἀκούσονται ακουω hear καὶ και and; even μαθήσονται μανθανω learn φοβεῖσθαι φοβεω afraid; fear κύριον κυριος lord; master τὸν ο the θεὸν θεος God ὑμῶν υμων your πάσας πας all; every τὰς ο the ἡμέρας ημερα day ὅσας οσος as much as; as many as αὐτοὶ αυτος he; him ζῶσιν ζαω live; alive ἐπὶ επι in; on τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land εἰς εις into; for ἣν ος who; what ὑμεῖς υμεις you διαβαίνετε διαβαινω step through; go across τὸν ο the Ιορδάνην ιορδανης Iordanēs; Iorthanis ἐκεῖ εκει there κληρονομῆσαι κληρονομεω inherit; heir αὐτήν αυτος he; him 31:13 וּ û וְ and בְנֵיהֶ֞ם vᵊnêhˈem בֵּן son אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] לֹֽא־ lˈō- לֹא not יָדְע֗וּ yāḏᵊʕˈû ידע know יִשְׁמְעוּ֙ yišmᵊʕˌû שׁמע hear וְ wᵊ וְ and לָ֣מְד֔וּ lˈāmᵊḏˈû למד learn לְ lᵊ לְ to יִרְאָ֖ה yirʔˌā ירא fear אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֵיכֶ֑ם ʔᵉlōhêḵˈem אֱלֹהִים god(s) כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole הַ ha הַ the יָּמִ֗ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] אַתֶּ֤ם ʔattˈem אַתֶּם you חַיִּים֙ ḥayyîm חַי alive עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon הָ֣ hˈā הַ the אֲדָמָ֔ה ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] אַתֶּ֜ם ʔattˈem אַתֶּם you עֹבְרִ֧ים ʕōvᵊrˈîm עבר pass אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the יַּרְדֵּ֛ן yyardˈēn יַרְדֵּן Jordan שָׁ֖מָּה šˌāmmā שָׁם there לְ lᵊ לְ to רִשְׁתָּֽהּ׃ פ rištˈāh . f ירשׁ trample down 31:13. filii quoque eorum qui nunc ignorant audire possint et timeant Dominum Deum suum cunctis diebus quibus versantur in terra ad quam vos Iordane transito pergitis obtinendamThat their children also, who now are ignorant, may hear, and fear the Lord their God, all the days that they live in the land whither you are going over the Jordan to possess it. 13. and that their children, which have not known, may hear, and learn to fear the LORD your God, as long as ye live in the land whither ye go over Jordan to possess it. 13: и сыны их, которые не знают [сего], услышат и научатся бояться Господа Бога вашего во все дни, доколе вы будете жить на земле, в которую вы переходите за Иордан, чтоб овладеть ею. 31:13 καὶ και and; even οἱ ο the υἱοὶ υιος son αὐτῶν αυτος he; him οἳ ος who; what οὐκ ου not οἴδασιν οιδα aware ἀκούσονται ακουω hear καὶ και and; even μαθήσονται μανθανω learn φοβεῖσθαι φοβεω afraid; fear κύριον κυριος lord; master τὸν ο the θεὸν θεος God ὑμῶν υμων your πάσας πας all; every τὰς ο the ἡμέρας ημερα day ὅσας οσος as much as; as many as αὐτοὶ αυτος he; him ζῶσιν ζαω live; alive ἐπὶ επι in; on τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land εἰς εις into; for ἣν ος who; what ὑμεῖς υμεις you διαβαίνετε διαβαινω step through; go across τὸν ο the Ιορδάνην ιορδανης Iordanēs; Iorthanis ἐκεῖ εκει there κληρονομῆσαι κληρονομεω inherit; heir αὐτήν αυτος he; him 31:13 וּ û וְ and בְנֵיהֶ֞ם vᵊnêhˈem בֵּן son אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] לֹֽא־ lˈō- לֹא not יָדְע֗וּ yāḏᵊʕˈû ידע know יִשְׁמְעוּ֙ yišmᵊʕˌû שׁמע hear וְ wᵊ וְ and לָ֣מְד֔וּ lˈāmᵊḏˈû למד learn לְ lᵊ לְ to יִרְאָ֖ה yirʔˌā ירא fear אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהוָ֣ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֵיכֶ֑ם ʔᵉlōhêḵˈem אֱלֹהִים god(s) כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole הַ ha הַ the יָּמִ֗ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] אַתֶּ֤ם ʔattˈem אַתֶּם you חַיִּים֙ ḥayyîm חַי alive עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon הָ֣ hˈā הַ the אֲדָמָ֔ה ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] אַתֶּ֜ם ʔattˈem אַתֶּם you עֹבְרִ֧ים ʕōvᵊrˈîm עבר pass אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the יַּרְדֵּ֛ן yyardˈēn יַרְדֵּן Jordan שָׁ֖מָּה šˌāmmā שָׁם there לְ lᵊ לְ to רִשְׁתָּֽהּ׃ פ rištˈāh . f ירשׁ trample down 31:13. filii quoque eorum qui nunc ignorant audire possint et timeant Dominum Deum suum cunctis diebus quibus versantur in terra ad quam vos Iordane transito pergitis obtinendam ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ That their children also, who now are ignorant, may hear, and fear the Lord their God, all the days that they live in the land whither you are going over the Jordan to possess it. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:13: Deu 6:7, Deu 11:2; Psa 78:4-8; Pro 22:6; Eph 6:4Geneva 159931:13 And [that] their children, which (f) have not known [any thing], may hear, and learn to fear the LORD your God, as long as ye live in the land whither ye go over Jordan to possess it.(f) Who were not born when the law was given. John Gill31:13 And that their children, which have not known anything,.... Of God and of his law and of their duty to God, to their parents, and the rest of their fellow creatures:may hear, and learn to fear the Lord your God; hear the law of God, learn the meaning of it, and so be brought up in the fear, nurture, and admonition of the Lord, and serve him their Creator in the days of their youth: as long as ye live in the land whither ye go over Jordan to possess it; this being a means to continue the fear, service, and worship of God in their posterity, and so of their long continuance in the land of Canaan. |
|
31:1431:14: Եւ ասէ Տէր ցՄովսէս. Ահա մերձեցա՛ն աւուրք մահուան քոյ. կոչեա՛ զՅեսու՝ եւ կացէ՛ք առաջի դրան խորանին վկայութեան, եւ հրաման տաց նմա։ Եւ գնացին Մովսէս եւ Յեսու ՚ի խորանն վկայութեան, եւ կացին ՚ի դրան խորանին վկայութեան[2044]։ [2044] Ոմանք. Եւ կացին առ դրան խո՛՛։ Եւ ասէ Տէր ցՄովսէս. Ահա մերձեցան աւուրք մահուան քո. կոչեա զՅեսու եւ կացէք [459]առաջի դրան խորանին վկայութեան``, եւ հրաման տաց նմա: Եւ գնացին Մովսէս եւ Յեսու [460]ի խորանն վկայութեան``, եւ կացին [461]առ դրան խորանին վկայութեան:14 Տէրն ասաց Մովսէսին. «Ահա մօտեցան քո մահուան օրերը: Կանչի՛ր Յեսուին, կանգնեցէ՛ք վկայութեան խորանի դռանը, որպէսզի պատուէր տամ նրան»: Մովսէսն ու Յեսուն գնացին դէպի վկայութեան խորանը եւ կանգնեցին վկայութեան խորանի դռանը: 14 Տէրը Մովսէսին ըսաւ. «Ահա մեռնելու օրերդ մօտեցան. Յեսուն կանչէ ու վկայութեան խորանը ներկայացէք, որպէս զի անոր պատուէր տամ»։ Ուստի Մովսէս ու Յեսու գացին վկայութեան խորանը ներկայացան։ 31:14: Եւ ասէ Տէր ցՄովսէս. Ահա մերձեցա՛ն աւուրք մահուան քոյ. կոչեա՛ զՅեսու՝ եւ կացէ՛ք առաջի դրան խորանին վկայութեան, եւ հրաման տաց նմա։ Եւ գնացին Մովսէս եւ Յեսու ՚ի խորանն վկայութեան, եւ կացին ՚ի դրան խորանին վկայութեան[2044]։ [2044] Ոմանք. Եւ կացին առ դրան խո՛՛։ 14 Տէրն ասաց Մովսէսին. «Ահա մօտեցան քո մահուան օրերը: Կանչի՛ր Յեսուին, կանգնեցէ՛ք վկայութեան խորանի դռանը, որպէսզի պատուէր տամ նրան»: Մովսէսն ու Յեսուն գնացին դէպի վկայութեան խորանը եւ կանգնեցին վկայութեան խորանի դռանը: 14 Տէրը Մովսէսին ըսաւ. «Ահա մեռնելու օրերդ մօտեցան. Յեսուն կանչէ ու վկայութեան խորանը ներկայացէք, որպէս զի անոր պատուէր տամ»։ Ուստի Մովսէս ու Յեսու գացին վկայութեան խորանը ներկայացան։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1414: И сказал Господь Моисею: вот, дни твои приблизились к смерти; призови Иисуса и станьте у скинии собрания, и Я дам ему наставления. И пришел Моисей и Иисус, и стали у скинии собрания. And the LORD said unto Moses, Behold, thy days approach that thou must die: call Joshua, and present yourselves in the tabernacle of the congregation, that I may give him a charge. And Moses and Joshua went, and presented themselves in the tabernacle of the congregation:31:14 καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak κύριος κυριος lord; master πρὸς προς to; toward Μωυσῆν μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs ἰδοὺ ιδου see!; here I am ἠγγίκασιν εγγιζω get close; near αἱ ο the ἡμέραι ημερα day τοῦ ο the θανάτου θανατος death σου σου of you; your κάλεσον καλεω call; invite Ἰησοῦν ιησους Iēsous; Iisus καὶ και and; even στῆτε ιστημι stand; establish παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even ἐντελοῦμαι εντελλομαι direct; enjoin αὐτῷ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐπορεύθη πορευομαι travel; go Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs καὶ και and; even Ἰησοῦς ιησους Iēsous; Iisus εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the σκηνὴν σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even ἔστησαν ιστημι stand; establish παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony 31:14 וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֨אמֶר yyˌōmer אמר say יְהוָ֜ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to מֹשֶׁ֗ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses הֵ֣ן hˈēn הֵן behold קָרְב֣וּ qārᵊvˈû קרב approach יָמֶיךָ֮ yāmeʸḵˈā יֹום day לָ lā לְ to מוּת֒ mûṯ מות die קְרָ֣א qᵊrˈā קרא call אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהֹושֻׁ֗עַ yᵊhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua וְ wᵊ וְ and הִֽתְיַצְּב֛וּ hˈiṯyaṣṣᵊvˈû יצב stand בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אֹ֥הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent מֹועֵ֖ד môʕˌēḏ מֹועֵד appointment וַ wa וְ and אֲצַוֶּ֑נּוּ ʔᵃṣawwˈennû צוה command וַ wa וְ and יֵּ֤לֶךְ yyˈēleḵ הלך walk מֹשֶׁה֙ mōšˌeh מֹשֶׁה Moses וִֽ wˈi וְ and יהֹושֻׁ֔עַ yhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua וַ wa וְ and יִּֽתְיַצְּב֖וּ yyˈiṯyaṣṣᵊvˌû יצב stand בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אֹ֥הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent מֹועֵֽד׃ môʕˈēḏ מֹועֵד appointment 31:14. et ait Dominus ad Mosen ecce prope sunt dies mortis tuae voca Iosue et state in tabernaculo testimonii ut praecipiam ei abierunt ergo Moses et Iosue et steterunt in tabernaculo testimoniiAnd the Lord said to Moses: Behold the days of thy death are nigh: call Josue, and stand ye in the tabernacle of the testimony, that I may give him a charge. So Moses and Josue went and stood in the tabernacle of the testimony: 14. And the LORD said unto Moses, Behold, thy days approach that thou must die: call Joshua, and present yourselves in the tent of meeting, that I may give him a charge. And Moses and Joshua went, and presented themselves in the tent of meeting. 14: И сказал Господь Моисею: вот, дни твои приблизились к смерти; призови Иисуса и станьте у скинии собрания, и Я дам ему наставления. И пришел Моисей и Иисус, и стали у скинии собрания. 31:14 καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak κύριος κυριος lord; master πρὸς προς to; toward Μωυσῆν μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs ἰδοὺ ιδου see!; here I am ἠγγίκασιν εγγιζω get close; near αἱ ο the ἡμέραι ημερα day τοῦ ο the θανάτου θανατος death σου σου of you; your κάλεσον καλεω call; invite Ἰησοῦν ιησους Iēsous; Iisus καὶ και and; even στῆτε ιστημι stand; establish παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even ἐντελοῦμαι εντελλομαι direct; enjoin αὐτῷ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐπορεύθη πορευομαι travel; go Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs καὶ και and; even Ἰησοῦς ιησους Iēsous; Iisus εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the σκηνὴν σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even ἔστησαν ιστημι stand; establish παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony 31:14 וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֨אמֶר yyˌōmer אמר say יְהוָ֜ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to מֹשֶׁ֗ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses הֵ֣ן hˈēn הֵן behold קָרְב֣וּ qārᵊvˈû קרב approach יָמֶיךָ֮ yāmeʸḵˈā יֹום day לָ lā לְ to מוּת֒ mûṯ מות die קְרָ֣א qᵊrˈā קרא call אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהֹושֻׁ֗עַ yᵊhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua וְ wᵊ וְ and הִֽתְיַצְּב֛וּ hˈiṯyaṣṣᵊvˈû יצב stand בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אֹ֥הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent מֹועֵ֖ד môʕˌēḏ מֹועֵד appointment וַ wa וְ and אֲצַוֶּ֑נּוּ ʔᵃṣawwˈennû צוה command וַ wa וְ and יֵּ֤לֶךְ yyˈēleḵ הלך walk מֹשֶׁה֙ mōšˌeh מֹשֶׁה Moses וִֽ wˈi וְ and יהֹושֻׁ֔עַ yhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua וַ wa וְ and יִּֽתְיַצְּב֖וּ yyˈiṯyaṣṣᵊvˌû יצב stand בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אֹ֥הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent מֹועֵֽד׃ môʕˈēḏ מֹועֵד appointment 31:14. et ait Dominus ad Mosen ecce prope sunt dies mortis tuae voca Iosue et state in tabernaculo testimonii ut praecipiam ei abierunt ergo Moses et Iosue et steterunt in tabernaculo testimonii ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the Lord said to Moses: Behold the days of thy death are nigh: call Josue, and stand ye in the tabernacle of the testimony, that I may give him a charge. So Moses and Josue went and stood in the tabernacle of the testimony: |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ mh▾ all ▾ Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 170614: Apostasy Foretold.B. C. 1451.14 And the LORD said unto Moses, Behold, thy days approach that thou must die: call Joshua, and present yourselves in the tabernacle of the congregation, that I may give him a charge. And Moses and Joshua went, and presented themselves in the tabernacle of the congregation. 15 And the LORD appeared in the tabernacle in a pillar of a cloud: and the pillar of the cloud stood over the door of the tabernacle. 16 And the LORD said unto Moses, Behold, thou shalt sleep with thy fathers; and this people will rise up, and go a whoring after the gods of the strangers of the land, whither they go to be among them, and will forsake me, and break my covenant which I have made with them. 17 Then my anger shall be kindled against them in that day, and I will forsake them, and I will hide my face from them, and they shall be devoured, and many evils and troubles shall befall them; so that they will say in that day, Are not these evils come upon us, because our God is not among us? 18 And I will surely hide my face in that day for all the evils which they shall have wrought, in that they are turned unto other gods. 19 Now therefore write ye this song for you, and teach it the children of Israel: put it in their mouths, that this song may be a witness for me against the children of Israel. 20 For when I shall have brought them into the land which I sware unto their fathers, that floweth with milk and honey; and they shall have eaten and filled themselves, and waxen fat; then will they turn unto other gods, and serve them, and provoke me, and break my covenant. 21 And it shall come to pass, when many evils and troubles are befallen them, that this song shall testify against them as a witness; for it shall not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed: for I know their imagination which they go about, even now, before I have brought them into the land which I sware. Here, I. Moses and Joshua are summoned to attend the divine majesty at the door of the tabernacle, v. 14. Moses is told again that he must shortly die; even those that are most ready and willing to die have need to be often reminded of the approach of death. In consideration of this, he must come himself to meet God; for whatever improves our communion with God furthers our preparation for death. He must also bring Joshua with him to be presented to God for a successor, and to receive his commission and charge. Moses readily obeys the summons, for he was not one of those that look with an evil eye upon their successors, but, on the contrary, rejoiced in him. II. God graciously gives them the meeting: He appeared in the tabernacle (as the shechinah used to appear) in a pillar of a cloud, v. 15. This is the only time in all this book that we read of the glory of God appearing, whereas we often read of it in the three foregoing books, which perhaps signifies that in the latter days, under the evangelical law, such visible appearances as these of the divine glory are not to be expected, but we must take heed to the more sure word of prophecy. III. He tells Moses that, after his death, the covenant which he had taken so much pains to make between Israel and their God would certainly be broken. 1. That Israel would forsake God, v. 16. And we may be sure that if the covenant between God and man be broken the blame must lie on man, it is he that breaks it; we have often observed it, That God never leaves any till they first leave him. Worshipping the gods of the Canaanites (who had been the natives, but henceforward were to be looked upon as the strangers of that land) would undoubtedly be counted a deserting of God, and, like adultery, a violation of the covenant. Thus still those are revolters from Christ, and will be so adjudged, who either make a god of their money by reigning covetousness or a god of their belly by reigning sensuality. Those that turn to other gods (v. 18) forsake their own mercies. This apostasy of theirs is foretold to be the effect of their prosperity (v. 20): They shall have eaten and filled themselves; this is all they will aim at in eating, to gratify their own appetites, and then they will wax fat, grow secure and sensual; their security will take off their dread of God and his judgments; and their sensuality will incline them to the idolatries of the heathen, which made provision for the flesh to fulfil the lusts of it. Note, God has a clear and infallible foresight of all the wickedness of the wicked, and has often covenanted with those who he knew would deal very treacherously (Isa. xlviii. 8), and conferred many favours on those who he knew would deal very ungratefully. 2. That then God would forsake Israel; and justly does he cast those off who had so unjustly cast him off (v. 17): My anger shall be kindled against them, and I will forsake them. His providence would forsake them, no longer to protect and prosper them, and then they would become a prey to all their neighbours. His spirit and grace would forsake them, no longer to teach and guide them, and then they would be more and more bigoted, besotted, and hardened in their idolatries. Thus many evils and troubles would befal them. (v. 17, 21), which would be such manifest indications of God's displeasure against them that they themselves would be constrained to own it: Have not these evils come upon us because our God is not among us? Those that have sinned away their God will find that thereby they pull all mischiefs upon their own heads. But that which completed their misery was that God would hide his face from them in that day, that day of their trouble and distress, v. 18. Whatever outward troubles we are in, if we have but the light of God's countenance, we may be easy. But, if God hide his face from us and our prayers, we are undone. IV. He directs Moses to deliver them a song, in the composing of which he should be divinely inspired, and which should remain a standing testimony for God as faithful to them in giving them warning, and against them as persons false to themselves in not taking the warning, v. 19. The written word in general, as well as this song in particular, is a witness for God against all those that break covenant with him. It shall be for a testimony, Matt. xxiv. 14. The wisdom of man has devised many ways of conveying the knowledge of good and evil, by laws, histories, prophecies, proverbs, and, among the rest, by songs; each has its advantages. And the wisdom of God has in the scripture made use of them all, that ignorant and careless men might be left inexcusable. 1. This song, if rightly improved, might be a means to prevent their apostasy; for in the inditing of it God had an eye to their present imagination, now, before they were brought into the land of promise, v. 21. God knew very well that there were in their hearts such gross conceits of the deity, and such inclinations of idolatry, that they would be tinder to the sparks of that temptation; and therefore in this song he gives them warning of their danger that way. Note, The word of God is a discerner of the thoughts and intents of men's hearts, and meets with them strangely by its reproofs and corrections, Heb. iv. 12. Compare 1 Cor. xiv. 25. Ministers who preach the word know not the imaginations men go about, but God, whose word it is, knows perfectly. 2. If this song did not prevent their apostasy, yet it might help to bring them to repentance, and to recover them from their apostasy. When their troubles come upon them, this song shall not be forgotten, but may serve as a glass to show them their own faces, that they may humble themselves, and return to him from whom they have revolted. Note, Those for whom God has mercy in store he may leave to fall, yet he will provide means for their recovery. Medicines are prepared before-hand for their cure. Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:14: The transaction recorded in these verses may be regarded as the solemn inauguration of Joshua to the office to which he had some time before Num 27:22 been called, and his recognition in it by God, which were manifested by his being summoned into the tabernacle with Moses while the Lord appeared in the pillar of cloud (compare Num 11:25; Num 12:5).R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:14: that thou must die: Deu 31:2, Deu 34:5; Num 27:13; Jos 23:14; Kg2 1:4; Ecc 9:5; Isa 38:1I may give: Deu 31:23; Num 27:19, Num 27:20; Act 20:28-31; Ti2 4:1-4 presented: Exo 34:2; Jos 24:1; Sa1 10:19; Job 1:6, Job 2:1; Rom 12:1; Jde 1:24 Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch31:14After handing over the office to Joshua, and the law to the priests and elders, Moses was called by the Lord to come to the tabernacle with Joshua, to command him (צוּה), i.e., to appoint him, confirm him in his office. To this end the Lord appeared in the tabernacle (Deut 31:15), in a pillar of cloud, which remained standing before it, as in Num 12:5 (see the exposition of Num 11:25). But before appointing Joshua, He announced to Moses that after his death the nation would go a whoring after other gods, and would break the covenant, for which it would be visited with severe afflictions, and directed him to write an ode and teach it to the children of Israel, that when the apostasy should take place, and punishment from God be felt in consequence, it might speak as a witness against the people, as it would not vanish from their memory. The Lord communicated this commission to Moses in the presence of Joshua, that he also might hear from the mouth of God that the Lord foreknew the future apostasy of the people, and yet nevertheless would bring them into the promised land. In this there was also implied an admonition to Joshua, not only to take care that the Israelites learned the ode and kept it in their memories, but also to strive with all his might to prevent the apostasy, so long as he was leader of Israel; which Joshua did most faithfully to the very end of his life (vid., Josh 23 and 24). - The announcement of the falling away of the Israelites from the Lord into idolatry, and the burning of the wrath of God in consequence (Deut 31:16-18), serves as a basis for the command in Deut 31:19. In this announcement the different points are simply linked together with "and," whereas in their actual signification they are subordinate to one another: When thou shalt lie with thy fathers, and the people shall rise up, and go a whoring after other gods: My anger will burn against them, etc. קוּם, to rise up, to prepare, serves to bring out distinctly the course which the thing would take. The expression, "foreign gods of the land," indicates that in the land which Jehovah gave His people, He (Jehovah) alone was God and Lord, and that He alone was to be worshipped there. בּקרבּו is in apposition to שׁמּה, "whither thou comest, in the midst of it." The punishment announced in Deut 31:17 corresponds most closely to the sin of the nation. For going a whoring after strange gods, the anger of the Lord would burn against them; for forsaking Him, He would forsake them; and for breaking His covenant, He would hide His face from them, i.e., withdraw His favour from them, so that they would be destroyed. לאכל היה, it (the nation) will be for devouring, i.e., will be devoured or destroyed (see Ewald, 237, c.; and on אכל in this sense, see Deut 7:16, and Num 14:9). "And many evils and troubles will befall it; and it will say in that day, Do not these evils befall me, because my God is not in the midst of me?" When the evils and troubles broke in upon the nation, the people would inquire the cause, and would find it in the fact that they were forsaken by their God; but the Lord ("but I" in Deut 31:18 forms the antithesis to "they" in Deut 31:17) would still hide His face, namely, because simply missing God is not true repentance. John Gill31:14 And the Lord said unto Moses,.... Either at the same time, or quickly after; rather, perhaps, the same day:behold, thy days approach that thou must die; which does not necessarily imply that he had some days to live, though but few; but that the time of his death drew nigh, his last moments were approaching; the time of his death being, as every man's is, fixed by the Lord, with whom is the number of his years, months, days, and moments, beyond which he cannot pass, Job 14:5, call Joshua, and present yourselves in the tabernacle of the congregation, that I may give him a charge; this looks as if the people had been dismissed after the above exhortations given; and now Joshua was called, and Moses with him, to have a charge given him: and Moses and Joshua went and presented themselves in the tabernacle of the congregation; before the Lord. Aben Ezra says, Moses went from the camp of Israel where he was, to the camp of the Shechinah; the Jews pretend to know in what form they walked thither. Moses, they say (a), went on the left hand of Joshua; and they went to the tabernacle, and the pillar of cloud descended and separated between them. (a) Debarim Rabba, sect. 9. fol. 244. 2. John Wesley31:14 Give him a charge - Immediately from myself for his greater encouragement, and to gain him more authority with the people.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:14 the Lord said unto Moses, . . .call Joshua, and present yourselves in the tabernacle of the congregation--Joshua had been publicly designated to the office of commander by Moses [Num 27:22-23]; and God was pleased to confirm his appointment by the visible symbols of His presence and approval. As none but the priests were privileged to enter the sanctuary, it is probable that this significant manifestation of the cloudy pillar was made while the leaders stood at the door of the tabernacle. |
|
31:1531:15: Եւ էջ Տէր սեամբ ամպոյ, եւ եկաց առ դրան խորանին վկայութեան. եւ եկաց սիւն ամպոյն առ դրան խորանին։ Եւ [462]էջ Տէր`` սեամբ ամպոյ [463]եւ եկաց առ դրան խորանին վկայութեան``, եւ եկաց սիւն ամպոյն առ դրան խորանին:15 Տէրն իջաւ ամպի սիւնի ձեւով ու կանգնեց վկայութեան խորանի դռանը: Խորանի դռանը կանգնեց նաեւ ամպի սիւնը: 15 Տէրը ամպի սիւնով խորանին մէջ երեւցաւ ու ամպի սիւնը վկայութեան խորանին դրանը վրայ կեցաւ։ 31:15: Եւ էջ Տէր սեամբ ամպոյ, եւ եկաց առ դրան խորանին վկայութեան. եւ եկաց սիւն ամպոյն առ դրան խորանին։ 15 Տէրն իջաւ ամպի սիւնի ձեւով ու կանգնեց վկայութեան խորանի դռանը: Խորանի դռանը կանգնեց նաեւ ամպի սիւնը: 15 Տէրը ամպի սիւնով խորանին մէջ երեւցաւ ու ամպի սիւնը վկայութեան խորանին դրանը վրայ կեցաւ։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1515: И явился Господь в скинии в столпе облачном, и стал столп облачный у входа скинии. And the LORD appeared in the tabernacle in a pillar of a cloud: and the pillar of the cloud stood over the door of the tabernacle:31:15 καὶ και and; even κατέβη καταβαινω step down; descend κύριος κυριος lord; master ἐν εν in νεφέλῃ νεφελη cloud καὶ και and; even ἔστη ιστημι stand; establish παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even ἔστη ιστημι stand; establish ὁ ο the στῦλος στυλος pillar τῆς ο the νεφέλης νεφελη cloud παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent 31:15 וַ wa וְ and יֵּרָ֧א yyērˈā ראה see יְהוָ֛ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the אֹ֖הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent בְּ bᵊ בְּ in עַמּ֣וּד ʕammˈûḏ עַמּוּד pillar עָנָ֑ן ʕānˈān עָנָן cloud וַ wa וְ and יַּעֲמֹ֛ד yyaʕᵃmˈōḏ עמד stand עַמּ֥וּד ʕammˌûḏ עַמּוּד pillar הֶ he הַ the עָנָ֖ן ʕānˌān עָנָן cloud עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon פֶּ֥תַח pˌeṯaḥ פֶּתַח opening הָ hā הַ the אֹֽהֶל׃ ס ʔˈōhel . s אֹהֶל tent 31:15. apparuitque Dominus ibi in columna nubis quae stetit in introitu tabernaculiAnd the Lord appeared there in the pillar of a cloud, which stood in the entry of the tabernacle. 15. And the LORD appeared in the Tent in a pillar of cloud: and the pillar of cloud stood over the door of the Tent. 15: И явился Господь в скинии в столпе облачном, и стал столп облачный у входа скинии. 31:15 καὶ και and; even κατέβη καταβαινω step down; descend κύριος κυριος lord; master ἐν εν in νεφέλῃ νεφελη cloud καὶ και and; even ἔστη ιστημι stand; establish παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even ἔστη ιστημι stand; establish ὁ ο the στῦλος στυλος pillar τῆς ο the νεφέλης νεφελη cloud παρὰ παρα from; by τὰς ο the θύρας θυρα door τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent 31:15 וַ wa וְ and יֵּרָ֧א yyērˈā ראה see יְהוָ֛ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the אֹ֖הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent בְּ bᵊ בְּ in עַמּ֣וּד ʕammˈûḏ עַמּוּד pillar עָנָ֑ן ʕānˈān עָנָן cloud וַ wa וְ and יַּעֲמֹ֛ד yyaʕᵃmˈōḏ עמד stand עַמּ֥וּד ʕammˌûḏ עַמּוּד pillar הֶ he הַ the עָנָ֖ן ʕānˌān עָנָן cloud עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon פֶּ֥תַח pˌeṯaḥ פֶּתַח opening הָ hā הַ the אֹֽהֶל׃ ס ʔˈōhel . s אֹהֶל tent 31:15. apparuitque Dominus ibi in columna nubis quae stetit in introitu tabernaculi ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the Lord appeared there in the pillar of a cloud, which stood in the entry of the tabernacle. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:15: Exo 33:9, Exo 33:10, Exo 40:38; Psa 99:7Geneva 159931:15 And the LORD appeared in the tabernacle in a pillar of a (g) cloud: and the pillar of the cloud stood over the door of the tabernacle.(g) In a cloud that was fashioned like a pillar. John Gill31:15 And the Lord appeared in the tabernacle in a pillar of cloud,.... As he was wont to do, see Ex 33:9; in which cloud there was a lustre, a brightness, a glory visible, which showed that he was there:and the pillar of the cloud stood over the door of the tabernacle; it seems to have appeared first in the tabernacle, and then it came out of it, and stood over the door of it, near to which Moses and Joshua were: the Targum of Jonathan adds,"Moses and Joshua stood without;'' though the former clause, according to Noldius (b), should be "over the tabernacle", or above where the cloud was wont to be. (b) Concord. Ebr. Part. p. 164. No. 737. |
|
31:1631:16: Եւ ասէ Տէր ցՄովսէս. Ահաւասիկ դու ննջեսցես ընդ հարս քո. եւ յարուցեալ ժողովուրդդ այդ պոռնկեսցի՛ զհետ աստուածոց օտարաց երկրին յոր մտանիցէ դա՛ ՚ի նոսա, եւ թողուցուն զիս. եւ ցրիցե՛ն զուխտն իմ զոր ուխտեցի ընդ դոսա[2045]։ [2045] Ոմանք. Ահաւադիկ դու ննջես՛՛... յերկրին յոր մտա՛՛... եւ ցրուիցեն զուխտն... ընդ նոսա։ Եւ ասէ Տէր ցՄովսէս. Ահաւասիկ դու ննջեսցես ընդ հարս քո, եւ յարուցեալ ժողովուրդդ այդ պոռնկեսցի զհետ աստուածոց օտարաց երկրին յոր մտանիցէ դա ի նոսա, եւ թողուցուն զիս եւ ցրիցեն զուխտն իմ զոր ուխտեցի ընդ դոսա:16 Տէրն ասաց Մովսէսին. «Ահա դու պիտի մահանաս ու գնաս քո նախնիների մօտ. այս ժողովուրդը պիտի ելնի ու պոռնկանայ՝ հետեւելով օտար աստուածներին այն երկրի, որոնց բնակիչների մէջ պիտի մտնի: Նա պիտի լքի ինձ ու պիտի խախտի իր հետ կնքած իմ ուխտը: 16 Տէրը Մովսէսին ըսաւ. «Ահա դուն քու հայրերուդ հետ պիտի ննջես ու այս ժողովուրդը պիտի ելլէ ու իր գացած երկրին օտար աստուածներուն ետեւէն երթալով՝ անոր մէջ շնութիւն պիտի ընէ եւ զիս պիտի թողու ու իրեն հետ ըրած ուխտս պիտի խափանէ։ 31:16: Եւ ասէ Տէր ցՄովսէս. Ահաւասիկ դու ննջեսցես ընդ հարս քո. եւ յարուցեալ ժողովուրդդ այդ պոռնկեսցի՛ զհետ աստուածոց օտարաց երկրին յոր մտանիցէ դա՛ ՚ի նոսա, եւ թողուցուն զիս. եւ ցրիցե՛ն զուխտն իմ զոր ուխտեցի ընդ դոսա[2045]։ [2045] Ոմանք. Ահաւադիկ դու ննջես՛՛... յերկրին յոր մտա՛՛... եւ ցրուիցեն զուխտն... ընդ նոսա։ 16 Տէրն ասաց Մովսէսին. «Ահա դու պիտի մահանաս ու գնաս քո նախնիների մօտ. այս ժողովուրդը պիտի ելնի ու պոռնկանայ՝ հետեւելով օտար աստուածներին այն երկրի, որոնց բնակիչների մէջ պիտի մտնի: Նա պիտի լքի ինձ ու պիտի խախտի իր հետ կնքած իմ ուխտը: 16 Տէրը Մովսէսին ըսաւ. «Ահա դուն քու հայրերուդ հետ պիտի ննջես ու այս ժողովուրդը պիտի ելլէ ու իր գացած երկրին օտար աստուածներուն ետեւէն երթալով՝ անոր մէջ շնութիւն պիտի ընէ եւ զիս պիտի թողու ու իրեն հետ ըրած ուխտս պիտի խափանէ։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1616: И сказал Господь Моисею: вот, ты почиешь с отцами твоими, и станет народ сей блудно ходить вслед чужих богов той земли, в которую он вступает, и оставит Меня, и нарушит завет Мой, который Я поставил с ним; And the LORD said unto Moses, Behold, thou shalt sleep with thy fathers; and this people will rise up, and go a whoring after the gods of the strangers of the land, whither they go [to be] among them, and will forsake me, and break my covenant which I have made with them:31:16 καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak κύριος κυριος lord; master πρὸς προς to; toward Μωυσῆν μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs ἰδοὺ ιδου see!; here I am σὺ συ you κοιμᾷ κοιμαω doze; fall asleep μετὰ μετα with; amid τῶν ο the πατέρων πατηρ father σου σου of you; your καὶ και and; even ἀναστὰς ανιστημι stand up; resurrect ὁ ο the λαὸς λαος populace; population οὗτος ουτος this; he ἐκπορνεύσει εκπορνευω prostitute out / herself; depraved ὀπίσω οπισω in back; after θεῶν θεος God ἀλλοτρίων αλλοτριος another's; stranger τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land εἰς εις into; for ἣν ος who; what οὗτος ουτος this; he εἰσπορεύεται εισπορευομαι intrude; travel into ἐκεῖ εκει there εἰς εις into; for αὐτήν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐγκαταλείψουσίν εγκαταλειπω abandon; leave behind με με me καὶ και and; even διασκεδάσουσιν διασκεδαζω the διαθήκην διαθηκη covenant μου μου of me; mine ἣν ος who; what διεθέμην διατιθεμαι put through; make αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him 31:16 וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֤אמֶר yyˈōmer אמר say יְהוָה֙ [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to מֹשֶׁ֔ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses הִנְּךָ֥ hinnᵊḵˌā הִנֵּה behold שֹׁכֵ֖ב šōḵˌēv שׁכב lie down עִם־ ʕim- עִם with אֲבֹתֶ֑יךָ ʔᵃvōṯˈeʸḵā אָב father וְ wᵊ וְ and קָם֩ qˌām קום arise הָ hā הַ the עָ֨ם ʕˌām עַם people הַ ha הַ the זֶּ֜ה zzˈeh זֶה this וְ wᵊ וְ and זָנָ֣ה׀ zānˈā זנה fornicate אַחֲרֵ֣י׀ ʔaḥᵃrˈê אַחַר after אֱלֹהֵ֣י ʔᵉlōhˈê אֱלֹהִים god(s) נֵֽכַר־ nˈēḵar- נֵכָר foreigner הָ hā הַ the אָ֗רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] ה֤וּא hˈû הוּא he בָא־ vā- בוא come שָׁ֨מָּה֙ šˈāmmā שָׁם there בְּ bᵊ בְּ in קִרְבֹּ֔ו qirbˈô קֶרֶב interior וַ wa וְ and עֲזָבַ֕נִי ʕᵃzāvˈanî עזב leave וְ wᵊ וְ and הֵפֵר֙ hēfˌēr פרר break אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּרִיתִ֔י bᵊrîṯˈî בְּרִית covenant אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] כָּרַ֖תִּי kārˌattî כרת cut אִתֹּֽו׃ ʔittˈô אֵת together with 31:16. dixitque Dominus ad Mosen ecce tu dormies cum patribus tuis et populus iste consurgens fornicabitur post deos alienos in terra ad quam ingredietur et habitabit in ea ibi derelinquet me et irritum faciet foedus quod pepigi cum eoAnd the Lord said to Moses: Behold thou shalt sleep with thy fathers, and this people rising up will go a fornicating after strange gods in the land, to which it goeth in to dwell: there will they forsake me, and will make void the covenant, which I have made with them, 16. And the LORD said unto Moses, Behold, thou shalt sleep with thy fathers; and this people will rise up, and go a whoring after the strange gods of the land, whither they go to be among them, and will forsake me, and break my covenant which I have made with them. 16: И сказал Господь Моисею: вот, ты почиешь с отцами твоими, и станет народ сей блудно ходить вслед чужих богов той земли, в которую он вступает, и оставит Меня, и нарушит завет Мой, который Я поставил с ним; 31:16 καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak κύριος κυριος lord; master πρὸς προς to; toward Μωυσῆν μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs ἰδοὺ ιδου see!; here I am σὺ συ you κοιμᾷ κοιμαω doze; fall asleep μετὰ μετα with; amid τῶν ο the πατέρων πατηρ father σου σου of you; your καὶ και and; even ἀναστὰς ανιστημι stand up; resurrect ὁ ο the λαὸς λαος populace; population οὗτος ουτος this; he ἐκπορνεύσει εκπορνευω prostitute out / herself; depraved ὀπίσω οπισω in back; after θεῶν θεος God ἀλλοτρίων αλλοτριος another's; stranger τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land εἰς εις into; for ἣν ος who; what οὗτος ουτος this; he εἰσπορεύεται εισπορευομαι intrude; travel into ἐκεῖ εκει there εἰς εις into; for αὐτήν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐγκαταλείψουσίν εγκαταλειπω abandon; leave behind με με me καὶ και and; even διασκεδάσουσιν διασκεδαζω the διαθήκην διαθηκη covenant μου μου of me; mine ἣν ος who; what διεθέμην διατιθεμαι put through; make αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him 31:16 וַ wa וְ and יֹּ֤אמֶר yyˈōmer אמר say יְהוָה֙ [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to מֹשֶׁ֔ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses הִנְּךָ֥ hinnᵊḵˌā הִנֵּה behold שֹׁכֵ֖ב šōḵˌēv שׁכב lie down עִם־ ʕim- עִם with אֲבֹתֶ֑יךָ ʔᵃvōṯˈeʸḵā אָב father וְ wᵊ וְ and קָם֩ qˌām קום arise הָ hā הַ the עָ֨ם ʕˌām עַם people הַ ha הַ the זֶּ֜ה zzˈeh זֶה this וְ wᵊ וְ and זָנָ֣ה׀ zānˈā זנה fornicate אַחֲרֵ֣י׀ ʔaḥᵃrˈê אַחַר after אֱלֹהֵ֣י ʔᵉlōhˈê אֱלֹהִים god(s) נֵֽכַר־ nˈēḵar- נֵכָר foreigner הָ hā הַ the אָ֗רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] ה֤וּא hˈû הוּא he בָא־ vā- בוא come שָׁ֨מָּה֙ šˈāmmā שָׁם there בְּ bᵊ בְּ in קִרְבֹּ֔ו qirbˈô קֶרֶב interior וַ wa וְ and עֲזָבַ֕נִי ʕᵃzāvˈanî עזב leave וְ wᵊ וְ and הֵפֵר֙ hēfˌēr פרר break אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּרִיתִ֔י bᵊrîṯˈî בְּרִית covenant אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] כָּרַ֖תִּי kārˌattî כרת cut אִתֹּֽו׃ ʔittˈô אֵת together with 31:16. dixitque Dominus ad Mosen ecce tu dormies cum patribus tuis et populus iste consurgens fornicabitur post deos alienos in terra ad quam ingredietur et habitabit in ea ibi derelinquet me et irritum faciet foedus quod pepigi cum eo ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the Lord said to Moses: Behold thou shalt sleep with thy fathers, and this people rising up will go a fornicating after strange gods in the land, to which it goeth in to dwell: there will they forsake me, and will make void the covenant, which I have made with them, |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:16: Behold, thou shalt sleep with thy fathers - שכב shocheb, thou shalt lie down; it signifies to rest, take rest in sleep, and, metaphorically, to die. Much stress cannot be safely laid on this expression to prove the immortality of the soul, or that the people in the time of Moses had a distinct notion of its separate existence. It was, however, understood in this sense by Jonathan ben Uzziel, who in his Targum paraphrases the word thus: "Thou shalt lie down in the dust with thy fathers; and thy soul (נשמתך nishmethach) shall be laid up in the treasury of the life to come with thy fathers."Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:16The future apostasy of the people is announced in the presence of Joshua that the latter might be fully aware of the danger and strive in his day to avert it. This he faithfully did (compare Jos 24:31); but we find him in his own last address to Israel repeating Jos 23:15-16 the self-same prediction and warning. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:16: thou shalt: Gen 25:8; Sa2 7:12; Isa 57:2; Act 13:36sleep: Heb. lie down, Shochaiv, "lying down:" it signifies to rest, take rest in sleep, and metaphorically, to die. Though much stress cannot be safely laid upon this expression to prove the immortality of the soul, or that the people, in the time of Moses, had a distinct notion of its separate existence; yet is was understood in this sense by Jonathan, who paraphrases the words thus: "Thou shalt lie down in the dust with thy fathers; and thy soul (nishmatoch) shall be laid up in the treasury of the life to come, with thy fathers." Job 20:11 and go a: Exo 32:6, Exo 34:15; Lev 20:3-6; Jdg 2:17-20; Psa 73:27, Psa 106:39; Isa 57:3-8; Jer 3:1-3; Eze 16:15, Eze 16:25-36, Eze 23:5-8, Eze 23:9-21; Hos 2:2-5; Rev 17:2-5, Rev 19:2 forsake me: Deu 32:15; Jdg 2:12, Jdg 10:6, Jdg 10:13; Jer 2:11-13 break my: Lev 26:15; Jdg 2:20; Jer 31:32 John Gill31:16 And the Lord said unto Moses,.... Out of the pillar of cloud:behold, thou shalt sleep with thy fathers; a phrase expressive of death, frequently used both of good and bad men, which serves to render death easy and familiar, and less formidable; and to assure and lead into an expectation of an awaking out of it, or a resurrection from it: and this people will rise up; in their posterity; for not till after Joshua's death, and the death of the elders of Israel, did they revolt to idolatry, Josh 24:31, and go a whoring after the gods of the strangers of the land, whither they go to be amongst them; that is, after the gods of the Canaanites, who though at this time the inhabitants of the land, yet when the children of Israel became possessors of it, they were the strangers of it; and being suffered to continue contrary to the directions God had given to destroy them, would be a means of drawing them into the worship of their idols, expressed here by going a whoring after them, or committing whoredom with them. Idolatry in Scripture is frequently signified by fornication and adultery; and, as foretold, this was the case; see Ps 106:35, and will forsake me: their husband, departing from his worship and service: and break my covenant which I have made with them at Sinai; and now again in the plains of Moab, and which had the nature of a matrimonial contract; see Jer 31:32. John Wesley31:16 The strangers of the land - That is, of the Canaanites, who will be turned out of their possessions, and become as strangers in their own land. This aggravates their folly to worship such gods as could neither preserve their friends, nor annoy their enemies.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:16 the Lord said unto Moses, . . . this people will rise up--In this remarkable interview, Moses was distinctly apprised of the infidelity of Israel, their corruptions of the true religion through intercourse with the idolatrous inhabitants of Canaan (Amos 5:26), and their chastisements in consequence of those national defections. |
|
31:1731:17: Եւ բարկացա՛յց դոցա սրտմտութեամբ յաւուր յայնմիկ, եւ լքի՛ց զդոսա, եւ դարձուցի՛ց զերեսս իմ ՚ի դոցանէ, եւ եղիցին կերակո՛ւր թշնամեաց, եւ գտցեն զդոսա չարի՛ք բազումք եւ նեղութիւնք. եւ ասասցեն յաւուր յայնմիկ. Քանզի չէ՛ Տէր Աստուած մեր ընդ մեզ, գտին զմեզ չարիքս այսոքիկ։ Եւ բարկացայց դոցա սրտմտութեամբ յաւուր յայնմիկ, եւ լքից զդոսա, եւ դարձուցից զերեսս իմ ի դոցանէ, եւ եղիցին կերակուր [464]թշնամեաց. եւ գտցեն զդոսա չարիք բազումք եւ նեղութիւնք, եւ ասասցեն յաւուր յայնմիկ. Քանզի չէ Տէր Աստուած մեր ընդ մեզ, գտին զմեզ չարիքս այսոքիկ:17 Այդ օրը սրտմտութեամբ պիտի բարկանամ նրանց վրայ, պիտի լքեմ նրանց, երեսս պիտի թեքեմ նրանցից, նրանք թշնամիների կեր պիտի դառնան, բազում չարիքներ ու նեղութիւններ պիտի կրեն ու այդ օրը պիտի ասեն. “Այս չարիքները մեզ վրայ թափուեցին, քանի որ մեր Տէր Աստուածը մեզ հետ չէ”: 17 Այն օրը իմ բարկութիւնս իր վրայ բորբոքելով՝ զանոնք պիտի լքեմ ու երեսս անոնցմէ պիտի ծածկեմ, որ բնաջինջ ըլլան։ Շատ չարիքներու ու նեղութիւններու հանդիպելով՝ պիտի ըսեն. ‘Մեր Աստուածը մեր մէջ չըլլալուն համար չէ՞ որ մենք այս չարիքները կը կրենք’։ 31:17: Եւ բարկացա՛յց դոցա սրտմտութեամբ յաւուր յայնմիկ, եւ լքի՛ց զդոսա, եւ դարձուցի՛ց զերեսս իմ ՚ի դոցանէ, եւ եղիցին կերակո՛ւր թշնամեաց, եւ գտցեն զդոսա չարի՛ք բազումք եւ նեղութիւնք. եւ ասասցեն յաւուր յայնմիկ. Քանզի չէ՛ Տէր Աստուած մեր ընդ մեզ, գտին զմեզ չարիքս այսոքիկ։ 17 Այդ օրը սրտմտութեամբ պիտի բարկանամ նրանց վրայ, պիտի լքեմ նրանց, երեսս պիտի թեքեմ նրանցից, նրանք թշնամիների կեր պիտի դառնան, բազում չարիքներ ու նեղութիւններ պիտի կրեն ու այդ օրը պիտի ասեն. “Այս չարիքները մեզ վրայ թափուեցին, քանի որ մեր Տէր Աստուածը մեզ հետ չէ”: 17 Այն օրը իմ բարկութիւնս իր վրայ բորբոքելով՝ զանոնք պիտի լքեմ ու երեսս անոնցմէ պիտի ծածկեմ, որ բնաջինջ ըլլան։ Շատ չարիքներու ու նեղութիւններու հանդիպելով՝ պիտի ըսեն. ‘Մեր Աստուածը մեր մէջ չըլլալուն համար չէ՞ որ մենք այս չարիքները կը կրենք’։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1717: и возгорится гнев Мой на него в тот день, и Я оставлю их и сокрою лице Мое от них, и он истреблен будет, и постигнут его многие бедствия и скорби, и скажет он в тот день: 'не потому ли постигли меня сии бедствия, что нет Бога моего среди меня?' Then my anger shall be kindled against them in that day, and I will forsake them, and I will hide my face from them, and they shall be devoured, and many evils and troubles shall befall them; so that they will say in that day, Are not these evils come upon us, because our God [is] not among us:31:17 καὶ και and; even ὀργισθήσομαι οργιζω impassioned; anger θυμῷ θυμος provocation; temper εἰς εις into; for αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that καὶ και and; even καταλείψω καταλειπω leave behind; remain αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἀποστρέψω αποστρεφω turn away; alienate τὸ ο the πρόσωπόν προσωπον face; ahead of μου μου of me; mine ἀπ᾿ απο from; away αὐτῶν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be κατάβρωμα καταβρωμα and; even εὑρήσουσιν ευρισκω find αὐτὸν αυτος he; him κακὰ κακος bad; ugly πολλὰ πολυς much; many καὶ και and; even θλίψεις θλιψις pressure καὶ και and; even ἐρεῖ ερεω.1 state; mentioned ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that διότι διοτι because; that οὐκ ου not ἔστιν ειμι be κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the θεός θεος God μου μου of me; mine ἐν εν in ἐμοί εμοι me εὕροσάν ευρισκω find με με me τὰ ο the κακὰ κακος bad; ugly ταῦτα ουτος this; he 31:17 וְ wᵊ וְ and חָרָ֣ה ḥārˈā חרה be hot אַפִּ֣י ʔappˈî אַף nose בֹ֣ו vˈô בְּ in בַ va בְּ in † הַ the יֹּום־ yyôm- יֹום day הַ֠ ha הַ the הוּא hû הוּא he וַ wa וְ and עֲזַבְתִּ֞ים ʕᵃzavtˈîm עזב leave וְ wᵊ וְ and הִסְתַּרְתִּ֨י histartˌî סתר hide פָנַ֤י fānˈay פָּנֶה face מֵהֶם֙ mēhˌem מִן from וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֣ה hāyˈā היה be לֶֽ lˈe לְ to אֱכֹ֔ל ʔᵉḵˈōl אכל eat וּ û וְ and מְצָאֻ֛הוּ mᵊṣāʔˈuhû מצא find רָעֹ֥ות rāʕˌôṯ רָעָה evil רַבֹּ֖ות rabbˌôṯ רַב much וְ wᵊ וְ and צָרֹ֑ות ṣārˈôṯ צָרָה distress וְ wᵊ וְ and אָמַר֙ ʔāmˌar אמר say בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֔וּא hˈû הוּא he הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative] לֹ֗א lˈō לֹא not עַ֣ל ʕˈal עַל upon כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that אֵ֤ין ʔˈên אַיִן [NEG] אֱלֹהַי֙ ʔᵉlōhˌay אֱלֹהִים god(s) בְּ bᵊ בְּ in קִרְבִּ֔י qirbˈî קֶרֶב interior מְצָא֖וּנִי mᵊṣāʔˌûnî מצא find הָ hā הַ the רָעֹ֥ות rāʕˌôṯ רָעָה evil הָ hā הַ the אֵֽלֶּה׃ ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these 31:17. et irascetur furor meus contra eum in die illo et derelinquam eum et abscondam faciem meam ab eo et erit in devorationem invenient eum omnia mala et adflictiones ita ut dicat in illo die vere quia non est Deus mecum invenerunt me haec malaAnd my wrath shall be kindled against them in that day: and I will forsake them, and will hide my face from them, and they shall be devoured: all evils and afflictions shall find them, so that they shall say in that day: In truth it is because God is not with me, that these evils have found me. 17. Then my anger shall be kindled against them in that day, and I will forsake them, and I will hide my face from them, and they shall be devoured, and many evils and troubles shall come upon them; so that they will say in that day, Are not these evils come upon us because our God is not among us? 17: и возгорится гнев Мой на него в тот день, и Я оставлю их и сокрою лице Мое от них, и он истреблен будет, и постигнут его многие бедствия и скорби, и скажет он в тот день: 'не потому ли постигли меня сии бедствия, что нет Бога моего среди меня?' 31:17 καὶ και and; even ὀργισθήσομαι οργιζω impassioned; anger θυμῷ θυμος provocation; temper εἰς εις into; for αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that καὶ και and; even καταλείψω καταλειπω leave behind; remain αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἀποστρέψω αποστρεφω turn away; alienate τὸ ο the πρόσωπόν προσωπον face; ahead of μου μου of me; mine ἀπ᾿ απο from; away αὐτῶν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be κατάβρωμα καταβρωμα and; even εὑρήσουσιν ευρισκω find αὐτὸν αυτος he; him κακὰ κακος bad; ugly πολλὰ πολυς much; many καὶ και and; even θλίψεις θλιψις pressure καὶ και and; even ἐρεῖ ερεω.1 state; mentioned ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that διότι διοτι because; that οὐκ ου not ἔστιν ειμι be κύριος κυριος lord; master ὁ ο the θεός θεος God μου μου of me; mine ἐν εν in ἐμοί εμοι me εὕροσάν ευρισκω find με με me τὰ ο the κακὰ κακος bad; ugly ταῦτα ουτος this; he 31:17 וְ wᵊ וְ and חָרָ֣ה ḥārˈā חרה be hot אַפִּ֣י ʔappˈî אַף nose בֹ֣ו vˈô בְּ in בַ va בְּ in † הַ the יֹּום־ yyôm- יֹום day הַ֠ ha הַ the הוּא hû הוּא he וַ wa וְ and עֲזַבְתִּ֞ים ʕᵃzavtˈîm עזב leave וְ wᵊ וְ and הִסְתַּרְתִּ֨י histartˌî סתר hide פָנַ֤י fānˈay פָּנֶה face מֵהֶם֙ mēhˌem מִן from וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֣ה hāyˈā היה be לֶֽ lˈe לְ to אֱכֹ֔ל ʔᵉḵˈōl אכל eat וּ û וְ and מְצָאֻ֛הוּ mᵊṣāʔˈuhû מצא find רָעֹ֥ות rāʕˌôṯ רָעָה evil רַבֹּ֖ות rabbˌôṯ רַב much וְ wᵊ וְ and צָרֹ֑ות ṣārˈôṯ צָרָה distress וְ wᵊ וְ and אָמַר֙ ʔāmˌar אמר say בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֔וּא hˈû הוּא he הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative] לֹ֗א lˈō לֹא not עַ֣ל ʕˈal עַל upon כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that אֵ֤ין ʔˈên אַיִן [NEG] אֱלֹהַי֙ ʔᵉlōhˌay אֱלֹהִים god(s) בְּ bᵊ בְּ in קִרְבִּ֔י qirbˈî קֶרֶב interior מְצָא֖וּנִי mᵊṣāʔˌûnî מצא find הָ hā הַ the רָעֹ֥ות rāʕˌôṯ רָעָה evil הָ hā הַ the אֵֽלֶּה׃ ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these 31:17. et irascetur furor meus contra eum in die illo et derelinquam eum et abscondam faciem meam ab eo et erit in devorationem invenient eum omnia mala et adflictiones ita ut dicat in illo die vere quia non est Deus mecum invenerunt me haec mala ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And my wrath shall be kindled against them in that day: and I will forsake them, and will hide my face from them, and they shall be devoured: all evils and afflictions shall find them, so that they shall say in that day: In truth it is because God is not with me, that these evils have found me. |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:17: my anger: Deu 29:20, Deu 32:21, Deu 32:22; Jdg 2:14, Jdg 2:15; Psa 2:12, Psa 90:11I will forsake: Ch1 28:9; Ch2 15:2; Jer 23:33, Jer 23:39; Hos 9:12 hide my face: Though this may allude to the withdrawing of the Shechinah, or visible appearance of Jehovah, yet the general meaning of the expression in Scripture is, the withdrawing of his approbation and protection, of which his visible appearance was formerly the sign and pledge. Deu 32:20; Job 13:24; Psa 27:9, Psa 30:7, Psa 89:46, Psa 104:29; Isa 8:17, Isa 64:7; Eze 39:23, Eze 39:24, Eze 39:29 befall them: Heb. find them, Neh 9:32 *marg. Job 34:11 Are not these: Deu 29:24-27; Num 14:42; Jdg 6:13; Isa 63:17 Geneva 159931:17 Then my anger shall be kindled against them in that day, and I will forsake them, and I will (h) hide my face from them, and they shall be devoured, and many evils and troubles shall befall them; so that they will say in that day, Are not these evils come upon us, because our God [is] not among us?(h) That is, I will take my favour from them; as turning his face toward us shows his favour. John Gill31:17 Then my anger shall be kindled against them in that day,.... As the anger of a man is against his wife who has treacherously departed from him: and jealousy, which is the rage of such a man, is very cruel; and much more the wrath and anger of a jealous God, who is a consuming fire:and I will forsake them; withdraw his favours from them, and his protection of them: and I will hide my face from them; take no notice of them in a providential way for good, nor hear their cries, to deliver them from evil: and they shall be devoured; by their enemies, or by the sore judgments of God, by famine, sword, pestilence, and evil beasts, they and their substance: and many evils and troubles shall befall them; both in their own land, and in other countries, where they would be, and have been carried captive: so that they will say in that day, are not these evils come upon us, because our God is not amongst us? of which they would be sensible by their being exposed to their enemies for want of his protection, and by the evils upon them through his displeasure, and by their being deprived of the good things that came from him; but no intimation is given of their being sensible of their sins as the cause of all this. John Wesley31:17 Hide my face - Withdraw my favour and help. Whatever outward troubles we are in if we have but the light of God's countenance, we are safe. But if God hide his face from us then we are undone.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:17 Then my anger shall be kindled, . . . and I will hide my face from them--an announcement of the withdrawal of the divine favor and protection of which the Shekinah was the symbol and pledge. It never appeared in the second temple; and its non-appearance was a prelude of "all the evils that came upon them, because their God was not among them." |
|
31:1831:18: Եւ ես դարձուցանելո՛վ դարձուցից զերեսս իմ ՚ի նոցանէ յաւուր յայնմիկ. վասն ամենայն չարեացն զոր արարին. զի դարձան յաստուածս օտարոտիս[2046]։ [2046] Յօրինակին պակասէր. Զերեսս իմ ՚ի նոցանէ։ Եւ ես դարձուցանելով դարձուցից զերեսս իմ ի նոցանէ յաւուր յայնմիկ վասն ամենայն չարեացն զոր արարին, զի դարձան յաստուածս օտարոտիս:18 Ես այդ օրը իմ երեսը պիտի դարձնեմ նրանցից բոլոր այն չարիքների համար, որ նրանք գործեցին, քանի որ յարեցին օտար աստուածների: 18 Բայց ես իմ երեսս բոլորովին պիտի ծածկեմ անոնց ըրած բոլոր չարութեանը համար, որովհետեւ ուրիշ աստուածներու դարձան։ 31:18: Եւ ես դարձուցանելո՛վ դարձուցից զերեսս իմ ՚ի նոցանէ յաւուր յայնմիկ. վասն ամենայն չարեացն զոր արարին. զի դարձան յաստուածս օտարոտիս[2046]։ [2046] Յօրինակին պակասէր. Զերեսս իմ ՚ի նոցանէ։ 18 Ես այդ օրը իմ երեսը պիտի դարձնեմ նրանցից բոլոր այն չարիքների համար, որ նրանք գործեցին, քանի որ յարեցին օտար աստուածների: 18 Բայց ես իմ երեսս բոլորովին պիտի ծածկեմ անոնց ըրած բոլոր չարութեանը համար, որովհետեւ ուրիշ աստուածներու դարձան։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1818: и Я сокрою лице Мое [от него] в тот день за все беззакония его, которые он сделает, обратившись к иным богам. And I will surely hide my face in that day for all the evils which they shall have wrought, in that they are turned unto other gods:31:18 ἐγὼ εγω I δὲ δε though; while ἀποστροφῇ αποστροφη turn away; alienate τὸ ο the πρόσωπόν προσωπον face; ahead of μου μου of me; mine ἀπ᾿ απο from; away αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that διὰ δια through; because of πάσας πας all; every τὰς ο the κακίας κακια badness; vice ἃς ος who; what ἐποίησαν ποιεω do; make ὅτι οτι since; that ἐπέστρεψαν επιστρεφω turn around; return ἐπὶ επι in; on θεοὺς θεος God ἀλλοτρίους αλλοτριος another's; stranger 31:18 וְ wᵊ וְ and אָנֹכִ֗י ʔānōḵˈî אָנֹכִי i הַסְתֵּ֨ר hastˌēr סתר hide אַסְתִּ֤יר ʔastˈîr סתר hide פָּנַי֙ pānˌay פָּנֶה face בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֔וּא hˈû הוּא he עַ֥ל ʕˌal עַל upon כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole הָ hā הַ the רָעָ֖ה rāʕˌā רָעָה evil אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] עָשָׂ֑ה ʕāśˈā עשׂה make כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that פָנָ֔ה fānˈā פנה turn אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֱלֹהִ֖ים ʔᵉlōhˌîm אֱלֹהִים god(s) אֲחֵרִֽים׃ ʔᵃḥērˈîm אַחֵר other 31:18. ego autem abscondam et celabo faciem meam in die illo propter omnia mala quae fecit quia secutus est deos alienosBut I will hide, and cover my face in that day, for all the evils which they have done, because they have followed strange gods. 18. And I will surely hide my face in that day for all the evil which they shall have wrought, in that they are turned unto other gods. 18: и Я сокрою лице Мое [от него] в тот день за все беззакония его, которые он сделает, обратившись к иным богам. 31:18 ἐγὼ εγω I δὲ δε though; while ἀποστροφῇ αποστροφη turn away; alienate τὸ ο the πρόσωπόν προσωπον face; ahead of μου μου of me; mine ἀπ᾿ απο from; away αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that διὰ δια through; because of πάσας πας all; every τὰς ο the κακίας κακια badness; vice ἃς ος who; what ἐποίησαν ποιεω do; make ὅτι οτι since; that ἐπέστρεψαν επιστρεφω turn around; return ἐπὶ επι in; on θεοὺς θεος God ἀλλοτρίους αλλοτριος another's; stranger 31:18 וְ wᵊ וְ and אָנֹכִ֗י ʔānōḵˈî אָנֹכִי i הַסְתֵּ֨ר hastˌēr סתר hide אַסְתִּ֤יר ʔastˈîr סתר hide פָּנַי֙ pānˌay פָּנֶה face בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֔וּא hˈû הוּא he עַ֥ל ʕˌal עַל upon כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole הָ hā הַ the רָעָ֖ה rāʕˌā רָעָה evil אֲשֶׁ֣ר ʔᵃšˈer אֲשֶׁר [relative] עָשָׂ֑ה ʕāśˈā עשׂה make כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that פָנָ֔ה fānˈā פנה turn אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֱלֹהִ֖ים ʔᵉlōhˌîm אֱלֹהִים god(s) אֲחֵרִֽים׃ ʔᵃḥērˈîm אַחֵר other 31:18. ego autem abscondam et celabo faciem meam in die illo propter omnia mala quae fecit quia secutus est deos alienos ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ But I will hide, and cover my face in that day, for all the evils which they have done, because they have followed strange gods. |
jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:18: I will surely hide my face - Withdraw my approbation and my protection. This is a general meaning of the word in Scripture.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:18: Deu 31:16, Deu 31:17John Gill31:18 I will surely hide my face in that day,.... Which is repeated for the certainty of it, and that it might be taken notice of; that he was the spring and source of all their good things, their sun and their shield, who being withdrawn from them, they would be deprived of every thing that was good, and be liable to all evil; and this he would do:for all the evils which they shall have wrought; for all the immoralities they should be guilty of, every transgression of his law, whether of the first or second table, and especially idolatry: in that they are turned unto other gods; to the worship and service of them, which of all evils would be the most provoking to God; and the way of speaking suggests as if all evils were included in idolatry, and sprang from it, or were committed with it. |
|
31:1931:19: Եւ արդ գրեցէ՛ք զբանս օրհնութեանս այսորիկ, եւ ուսուսջի՛ք զդա որդւոցն Իսրայէլի, եւ արկջի՛ք զդա ՚ի բերան նոցա. զի եղիցի ինձ օրհնութիւնդ այդ ՚ի վկայութիւն ՚ի մէջ որդւոցդ Իսրայէլի. Եւ արդ գրեցէք զբանս օրհնութեանս այսորիկ, եւ ուսուսջիք զդա որդւոցն Իսրայելի, եւ արկջիք զդա ի բերան նոցա, զի եղիցի ինձ օրհնութիւնդ այդ ի վկայութիւն ի մէջ որդւոցդ Իսրայելի:19 Ուրեմն գրեցէ՛ք օրհներգութեան այս խօսքերը, դրանք սովորեցրէ՛ք իսրայէլացիներին, դրանք դրէ՛ք նրանց բերանը, որպէսզի այդ օրհներգութիւնը իսրայէլացիների մէջ ինձ համար վկայութիւն լինի: 19 Ուստի հիմա այս երգը գրեցէք ու Իսրայէլի որդիներուն սորվեցուցէք զանիկա անոնց բերանը դնելով, որպէս զի այս երգը Իսրայէլի որդիներուն մէջ ինծի վկայութեան համար ըլլայ։ 31:19: Եւ արդ գրեցէ՛ք զբանս օրհնութեանս այսորիկ, եւ ուսուսջի՛ք զդա որդւոցն Իսրայէլի, եւ արկջի՛ք զդա ՚ի բերան նոցա. զի եղիցի ինձ օրհնութիւնդ այդ ՚ի վկայութիւն ՚ի մէջ որդւոցդ Իսրայէլի. 19 Ուրեմն գրեցէ՛ք օրհներգութեան այս խօսքերը, դրանք սովորեցրէ՛ք իսրայէլացիներին, դրանք դրէ՛ք նրանց բերանը, որպէսզի այդ օրհներգութիւնը իսրայէլացիների մէջ ինձ համար վկայութիւն լինի: 19 Ուստի հիմա այս երգը գրեցէք ու Իսրայէլի որդիներուն սորվեցուցէք զանիկա անոնց բերանը դնելով, որպէս զի այս երգը Իսրայէլի որդիներուն մէջ ինծի վկայութեան համար ըլլայ։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:1919: Итак напишите себе [слова] песни сей, и научи ей сынов Израилевых, и вложи ее в уста их, чтобы песнь сия была Мне свидетельством на сынов Израилевых; Now therefore write ye this song for you, and teach it the children of Israel: put it in their mouths, that this song may be a witness for me against the children of Israel:31:19 καὶ και and; even νῦν νυν now; present γράψατε γραφω write τὰ ο the ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase τῆς ο the ᾠδῆς ωδη song ταύτης ουτος this; he καὶ και and; even διδάξετε διδασκω teach αὐτὴν αυτος he; him τοὺς ο the υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel καὶ και and; even ἐμβαλεῖτε εμβαλλω inject; cast in αὐτὴν αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for τὸ ο the στόμα στομα mouth; edge αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἵνα ινα so; that γένηταί γινομαι happen; become μοι μοι me ἡ ο the ᾠδὴ ωδη song αὕτη ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for μαρτύριον μαρτυριον evidence; testimony ἐν εν in υἱοῖς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:19 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַתָּ֗ה ʕattˈā עַתָּה now כִּתְב֤וּ kiṯᵊvˈû כתב write לָכֶם֙ lāḵˌem לְ to אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֣ה ššîrˈā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֔את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this וְ wᵊ וְ and לַמְּדָ֥הּ lammᵊḏˌāh למד learn אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּנֵי־ bᵊnê- בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל yiśrāʔˌēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel שִׂימָ֣הּ śîmˈāh שׂים put בְּ bᵊ בְּ in פִיהֶ֑ם fîhˈem פֶּה mouth לְמַ֨עַן lᵊmˌaʕan לְמַעַן because of תִּהְיֶה־ tihyeh- היה be לִּ֜י llˈî לְ to הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֥ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֛את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵ֖ד ʕˌēḏ עֵד witness בִּ bi בְּ in בְנֵ֥י vᵊnˌê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:19. nunc itaque scribite vobis canticum istud et docete filios Israhel ut memoriter teneant et ore decantent et sit mihi carmen istud pro testimonio inter filios IsrahelNow therefore write you this canticle, and teach the children of Israel: that they may know it by heart, and sing it by mouth, and this song may be unto me for a testimony among the children of Israel. 19. Now therefore write ye this song for you, and teach thou it the children of Israel: put it in their mouths, that this song may be a witness for me against the children of Israel. 19: Итак напишите себе [слова] песни сей, и научи ей сынов Израилевых, и вложи ее в уста их, чтобы песнь сия была Мне свидетельством на сынов Израилевых; 31:19 καὶ και and; even νῦν νυν now; present γράψατε γραφω write τὰ ο the ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase τῆς ο the ᾠδῆς ωδη song ταύτης ουτος this; he καὶ και and; even διδάξετε διδασκω teach αὐτὴν αυτος he; him τοὺς ο the υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel καὶ και and; even ἐμβαλεῖτε εμβαλλω inject; cast in αὐτὴν αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for τὸ ο the στόμα στομα mouth; edge αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἵνα ινα so; that γένηταί γινομαι happen; become μοι μοι me ἡ ο the ᾠδὴ ωδη song αὕτη ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for μαρτύριον μαρτυριον evidence; testimony ἐν εν in υἱοῖς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:19 וְ wᵊ וְ and עַתָּ֗ה ʕattˈā עַתָּה now כִּתְב֤וּ kiṯᵊvˈû כתב write לָכֶם֙ lāḵˌem לְ to אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֣ה ššîrˈā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֔את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this וְ wᵊ וְ and לַמְּדָ֥הּ lammᵊḏˌāh למד learn אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּנֵי־ bᵊnê- בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל yiśrāʔˌēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel שִׂימָ֣הּ śîmˈāh שׂים put בְּ bᵊ בְּ in פִיהֶ֑ם fîhˈem פֶּה mouth לְמַ֨עַן lᵊmˌaʕan לְמַעַן because of תִּהְיֶה־ tihyeh- היה be לִּ֜י llˈî לְ to הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֥ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֛את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵ֖ד ʕˌēḏ עֵד witness בִּ bi בְּ in בְנֵ֥י vᵊnˌê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:19. nunc itaque scribite vobis canticum istud et docete filios Israhel ut memoriter teneant et ore decantent et sit mihi carmen istud pro testimonio inter filios Israhel ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Now therefore write you this canticle, and teach the children of Israel: that they may know it by heart, and sing it by mouth, and this song may be unto me for a testimony among the children of Israel. |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:19: Write ye this song - The song which follows in the next chapter. Things which were of great importance and of common concern were, among the ancients, put into verse, as this was found the best method of keeping them in remembrance, especially in those times when writing was little practiced. Even prose was sometimes sung. The history of Herodotus was divided into Nine books, and each inscribed with the name of one of the Nine Muses, because these books were anciently sung. Homer is reported to have sung his poems through different Greek cities. Aristotle observes that anciently the people sung their laws. And Cicero observes that it was a custom among the ancient Romans to sing the praises of their heroes at the public festivals. This was the case among the northern inhabitants of Europe, particularly in Ireland and Scotland; hence the Gaelic poetry of Ossian and others. See Dodd; and see the note on Exo 15:1, where the subject is largely treated.Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:19A witness for me against them - i. e., an attestation from their own mouths at once of God's benefits, their own duties, and their deserts when they should fall away. Being in verse it would be the more easily learned and kept in memory. The use of songs for such didactic purposes was not unknown to the legislators of antiquity. Compare also the advice of Paul, "teaching and admonishing one another in psalms and hymns and spiritual songs" Col 3:16. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:19: this song: Deu 31:22, Deu 31:30, Deu 32:1-43, Deu 32:44, Deu 32:45and teach it: Deu 4:9, Deu 4:10, Deu 6:7, Deu 11:19 put it in their: Exo 4:15; Sa2 14:3; Isa 51:16, Isa 59:21; Jer 1:9 a witness: Deu 31:21, Deu 31:26; Eze 2:5; Mat 10:18; Joh 12:48 Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch31:19"And now," sc., because what was announced in Deut 31:16-18 would take place, "write you this song." "This" refers to the song which follows in ch. 32. Moses and Joshua were to write the song, because they were both of them to strive to prevent the apostasy of the people; and Moses, as the author, was to teach it to the children of Israel, to make them learn it, that it might be a witness for the Lord (for Me) against the children of Israel. "This" is defined still further in Deut 31:20, Deut 31:21 : if Israel, through growing satisfied and fat in its land, which was so rich in costly good, should turn to other gods, and the Lord should visit it in consequence with grievous evils and troubles, the song was to answer before Israel as a witness; i.e., not only serve the Lord as a witness to the people that He had foretold all the evil consequences of apostasy, and had given Israel proper warning (Knobel), but to serve, as we may see from Deut 31:20, Deut 31:21, and from the contents of the song, as a witness, on the one hand, that the Lord had conferred upon the people so many benefits and bestowed upon them such abundant blessings of His grace, that apostasy from Him was the basest ingratitude, for which they would justly be punished; and, on the other hand, that the Lord had not rejected His people in spite of the punishments inflicted upon them, but would once more have compassion upon them and requite their foes, and thus would sanctify and glorify Himself as the only true God by His judgments upon Israel and the nations. The law, with its commandments, promises, and threats, was already a witness of this kind against Israel (cf. Deut 31:26); but just as in every other instance the appearance of a plurality of unanimous witnesses raises the matter into an indisputable truth, so the Lord would set up another witness against the Israelites besides the law, in the form of this song, which was adapted to give all the louder warning, "because the song would not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed" (Deut 31:21). The song, when once it had passed into the mouths of the people, would not very readily vanish from their memory, but would be transmitted from generation to generation, and be heard from the mouths of their descendants, as a perpetual warning voice, as it would be used by Israel for God knew the invention of the people, i.e., the thoughts and purposes of their heart, which they cherished (עשׂה used to denote the doing of the heart, as in Is 32:6) even then before He had brought them into Canaan. (On Deut 31:20, vid., Deut 7:5; Deut 9:5, and Ex 3:8.) - In Deut 31:22 the result is anticipated, and the command of God is followed immediately by an account of its completion by Moses (just as in Ex 12:50; Lev 16:34, etc.). - After this command with reference to the song, the Lord appointed Joshua to the office which he had been commanded to take, urging him at the same time to be courageous, and promising him His help in the conquest of Canaan. That the subject to ויצו is not Moses, but Jehovah, is evident partly from the words themselves, "I will be with thee' (vid., Ex 3:12). (Note: Knobel's assertion (on Num 27:23) that the appointment of Joshua on the part of Moses by the imposition of hands, as described in that passage, is at variance with this verse, scarcely needs any refutation. Or is it really the case, that the installation of Joshua on the part of God is irreconcilable with his ordination by Moses?) Geneva 159931:19 Now therefore write ye this (i) song for you, and teach it the children of Israel: put it in their mouths, that this song may be a witness for me against the children of Israel.(i) To preserve you and your children from idolatry, by remembering God's benefits. John Gill31:19 Now, therefore, write ye this song for you,.... Which was now dictated by the Lord, and given to Moses and Joshua to write, which is recorded in Deut 32:1,and teach it the children of Israel; teach them by it, instructing them in the meaning of it: thus it was usual in ancient times to write things in verses, that they might be the more pleasingly attended to and regarded, and be longer retained in memory; and especially this practice was used with children, and still is: put it in their mouths; oblige them to get it by heart, or lay it up in their memories, and repeat it frequently, that it may be familiar to them, and not be forgotten by them: that this song may be a witness for me against the children of Israel; when in times to come they shall call to mind how in this song they were cautioned against such and such sins, and what they were threatened with should befall them on account of them, and how all things have come to pass exactly as foretold in it; which would be a testimony for God of his goodness to them, of his tender care of them, and concern for them, in the previous cautions he gave them; and of his foreknowledge of future events; and a testimony against them for their ingratitude and other sins. John Wesley31:19 Write this song - Which is contained Deu. 32:1-43, and is put into a song that it may be better learned, and more fixed in their minds and memories. Put it in their mouths - Cause them to learn it, and sing it one to another, to oblige them to more circumspection. A witness - Of my kindness in giving them so many blessings, of my patience in bearing so long with them, of my clemency in giving them such fair and plain warnings, and my justice in punishing such an incorrigible people.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:19 Now therefore write ye this song--National songs take deep hold of the memories and have a powerful influence in stirring the deepest feelings of a people. In accordance with this principle in human nature, a song was ordered to be composed by Moses, doubtless under divine inspiration, which was to be learnt by the Israelites themselves and to be taught to their children in every age, embodying the substance of the preceding addresses, and of a strain well suited to inspire the popular mind with a strong sense of God's favor to their nation. |
|
31:2031:20: քանզի տարա՛յց զդոսա յերկիրն բարի զոր երդուայ հա՛րց նոցա, երկիր որ բղխէ զկաթն եւ զմեղր, եւ կերիցեն եւ լցեալ յագեսցի՛ն. եւ դառնայցեն յաստուածս օտարոտիս, եւ պաշտիցե՛ն զնոսա, եւ զայրացուցանիցեն զիս. եւ ցրիցեն զուխտն իմ զոր ուխտեցի նոցա[2047]. [2047] Յօրինակին. Եւ ցրեցին զուխտն իմ։ Քանզի տարայց զդոսա յերկիրն [465]բարի զոր երդուայ հարց նոցա. երկիր` որ բղխէ զկաթն եւ զմեղր, եւ կերիցեն եւ լցեալ յագեսցին. եւ դառնայցեն յաստուածս օտարոտիս եւ պաշտիցեն զնոսա, եւ զայրացուցանիցեն զիս, եւ ցրիցեն զուխտն իմ զոր ուխտեցի նոցա:20 Արդարեւ, ես նրանց տանելու եմ այն լաւ երկիրը, որ երդուել եմ տալ նրանց հայրերին, մի երկիր, ուր կաթ ու մեղր է հոսում: Թող ուտեն ու լիուլի յագենան: Յետոյ նորից պիտի յարեն օտար աստուածների, պիտի պաշտեն դրանք, ինձ պիտի զայրացնեն ու դրժեն նրանց հետ կնքած իմ ուխտը: 20 Քանզի զանոնք պիտի տանիմ այն կաթ ու մեղր բղխող երկիրը, որուն համար ես անոնց հայրերուն երդում ըրի եւ անոնք պիտի ուտեն ու կշտանան եւ գիրնան ու ետքը ուրիշ աստուածներու դառնալով եւ անոնց ծառայութիւն ընելով՝ զիս պիտի արհամարհեն ու իմ ուխտս պիտի խափանեն։ 31:20: քանզի տարա՛յց զդոսա յերկիրն բարի զոր երդուայ հա՛րց նոցա, երկիր որ բղխէ զկաթն եւ զմեղր, եւ կերիցեն եւ լցեալ յագեսցի՛ն. եւ դառնայցեն յաստուածս օտարոտիս, եւ պաշտիցե՛ն զնոսա, եւ զայրացուցանիցեն զիս. եւ ցրիցեն զուխտն իմ զոր ուխտեցի նոցա[2047]. [2047] Յօրինակին. Եւ ցրեցին զուխտն իմ։ 20 Արդարեւ, ես նրանց տանելու եմ այն լաւ երկիրը, որ երդուել եմ տալ նրանց հայրերին, մի երկիր, ուր կաթ ու մեղր է հոսում: Թող ուտեն ու լիուլի յագենան: Յետոյ նորից պիտի յարեն օտար աստուածների, պիտի պաշտեն դրանք, ինձ պիտի զայրացնեն ու դրժեն նրանց հետ կնքած իմ ուխտը: 20 Քանզի զանոնք պիտի տանիմ այն կաթ ու մեղր բղխող երկիրը, որուն համար ես անոնց հայրերուն երդում ըրի եւ անոնք պիտի ուտեն ու կշտանան եւ գիրնան ու ետքը ուրիշ աստուածներու դառնալով եւ անոնց ծառայութիւն ընելով՝ զիս պիտի արհամարհեն ու իմ ուխտս պիտի խափանեն։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2020: ибо Я введу их в землю, как Я клялся отцам их, где течет молоко и мед, и они будут есть и насыщаться, и утучнеют, и обратятся к иным богам, и будут служить им, а Меня отвергнут и нарушат завет Мой. For when I shall have brought them into the land which I sware unto their fathers, that floweth with milk and honey; and they shall have eaten and filled themselves, and waxen fat; then will they turn unto other gods, and serve them, and provoke me, and break my covenant:31:20 εἰσάξω εισαγω lead in; bring in γὰρ γαρ for αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τὴν ο the ἀγαθήν αγαθος good ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσα ομνυω swear τοῖς ο the πατράσιν πατηρ father αὐτῶν αυτος he; him δοῦναι διδωμι give; deposit αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him γῆν γη earth; land ῥέουσαν ρεω flow γάλα γαλα milk καὶ και and; even μέλι μελι honey καὶ και and; even φάγονται φαγω swallow; eat καὶ και and; even ἐμπλησθέντες εμπιπλημι fill in; fill up κορήσουσιν κορεω and; even ἐπιστραφήσονται επιστρεφω turn around; return ἐπὶ επι in; on θεοὺς θεος God ἀλλοτρίους αλλοτριος another's; stranger καὶ και and; even λατρεύσουσιν λατρευω employed by αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even παροξυνοῦσίν παροξυνω goad; irritate με με me καὶ και and; even διασκεδάσουσιν διασκεδαζω the διαθήκην διαθηκη covenant μου μου of me; mine 31:20 כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that אֲבִיאֶ֜נּוּ ʔᵃvîʔˈennû בוא come אֶֽל־ ʔˈel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אֲדָמָ֣ה׀ ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתִּי nišbˈaʕtî שׁבע swear לַ la לְ to אֲבֹתָ֗יו ʔᵃvōṯˈāʸw אָב father זָבַ֤ת zāvˈaṯ זוב flow חָלָב֙ ḥālˌāv חָלָב milk וּ û וְ and דְבַ֔שׁ ḏᵊvˈaš דְּבַשׁ honey וְ wᵊ וְ and אָכַ֥ל ʔāḵˌal אכל eat וְ wᵊ וְ and שָׂבַ֖ע śāvˌaʕ שׂבע be sated וְ wᵊ וְ and דָשֵׁ֑ן ḏāšˈēn דשׁן grow fat וּ û וְ and פָנָ֞ה fānˈā פנה turn אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֱלֹהִ֤ים ʔᵉlōhˈîm אֱלֹהִים god(s) אֲחֵרִים֙ ʔᵃḥērîm אַחֵר other וַ wa וְ and עֲבָד֔וּם ʕᵃvāḏˈûm עבד work, serve וְ wᵊ וְ and נִ֣אֲצ֔וּנִי nˈiʔᵃṣˈûnî נאץ contemn וְ wᵊ וְ and הֵפֵ֖ר hēfˌēr פרר break אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּרִיתִֽי׃ bᵊrîṯˈî בְּרִית covenant 31:20. introducam enim eum in terram pro qua iuravi patribus eius lacte et melle manantem cumque comederint et saturati crassique fuerint avertentur ad deos alienos et servient eis et detrahent mihi et irritum facient pactum meumFor I will bring them into the land, for which I swore to their fathers, that floweth with milk and honey. And when they have eaten, and are full and fat, they will turn away after strange gods, and will serve them: and will despise me, and make void my covenant. 20. For when I shall have brought them into the land which I sware unto their fathers, flowing with milk and honey; and they shall have eaten and filled themselves, and waxen fat; then will they turn unto other gods, and serve them, and despise me, and break my covenant. 20: ибо Я введу их в землю, как Я клялся отцам их, где течет молоко и мед, и они будут есть и насыщаться, и утучнеют, и обратятся к иным богам, и будут служить им, а Меня отвергнут и нарушат завет Мой. 31:20 εἰσάξω εισαγω lead in; bring in γὰρ γαρ for αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τὴν ο the ἀγαθήν αγαθος good ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσα ομνυω swear τοῖς ο the πατράσιν πατηρ father αὐτῶν αυτος he; him δοῦναι διδωμι give; deposit αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him γῆν γη earth; land ῥέουσαν ρεω flow γάλα γαλα milk καὶ και and; even μέλι μελι honey καὶ και and; even φάγονται φαγω swallow; eat καὶ και and; even ἐμπλησθέντες εμπιπλημι fill in; fill up κορήσουσιν κορεω and; even ἐπιστραφήσονται επιστρεφω turn around; return ἐπὶ επι in; on θεοὺς θεος God ἀλλοτρίους αλλοτριος another's; stranger καὶ και and; even λατρεύσουσιν λατρευω employed by αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even παροξυνοῦσίν παροξυνω goad; irritate με με me καὶ και and; even διασκεδάσουσιν διασκεδαζω the διαθήκην διαθηκη covenant μου μου of me; mine 31:20 כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that אֲבִיאֶ֜נּוּ ʔᵃvîʔˈennû בוא come אֶֽל־ ʔˈel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אֲדָמָ֣ה׀ ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתִּי nišbˈaʕtî שׁבע swear לַ la לְ to אֲבֹתָ֗יו ʔᵃvōṯˈāʸw אָב father זָבַ֤ת zāvˈaṯ זוב flow חָלָב֙ ḥālˌāv חָלָב milk וּ û וְ and דְבַ֔שׁ ḏᵊvˈaš דְּבַשׁ honey וְ wᵊ וְ and אָכַ֥ל ʔāḵˌal אכל eat וְ wᵊ וְ and שָׂבַ֖ע śāvˌaʕ שׂבע be sated וְ wᵊ וְ and דָשֵׁ֑ן ḏāšˈēn דשׁן grow fat וּ û וְ and פָנָ֞ה fānˈā פנה turn אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֱלֹהִ֤ים ʔᵉlōhˈîm אֱלֹהִים god(s) אֲחֵרִים֙ ʔᵃḥērîm אַחֵר other וַ wa וְ and עֲבָד֔וּם ʕᵃvāḏˈûm עבד work, serve וְ wᵊ וְ and נִ֣אֲצ֔וּנִי nˈiʔᵃṣˈûnî נאץ contemn וְ wᵊ וְ and הֵפֵ֖ר hēfˌēr פרר break אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּרִיתִֽי׃ bᵊrîṯˈî בְּרִית covenant 31:20. introducam enim eum in terram pro qua iuravi patribus eius lacte et melle manantem cumque comederint et saturati crassique fuerint avertentur ad deos alienos et servient eis et detrahent mihi et irritum facient pactum meum ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ For I will bring them into the land, for which I swore to their fathers, that floweth with milk and honey. And when they have eaten, and are full and fat, they will turn away after strange gods, and will serve them: and will despise me, and make void my covenant. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:20: when: Deu 6:10-12, Deu 7:1, Deu 8:7floweth: Exo 3:8, Exo 3:17 eaten: Deu 8:10-14; Neh 9:25, Neh 9:26 waxen fat: Deu 32:15; Neh 9:25, Neh 9:26, Neh 9:35; Psa 17:10, Psa 73:7, Psa 119:70; Jer 5:28, Jer 50:11; Eze 34:16, Eze 34:20; Hos 13:6 then: Deu 31:16, Deu 31:17 Geneva 159931:20 For when I shall have brought them into the land which I sware unto their fathers, that floweth with milk and honey; and they shall have eaten and filled themselves, and waxen fat; (k) then will they turn unto other gods, and serve them, and provoke me, and break my covenant.(k) For this is the nature of flesh, no longer to obey God, than it is under the rod. John Gill31:20 For when I shall have brought them into the land which I sware unto their fathers,.... To give it to them, and put them into the possession of it, even the land of Canaan, often thus described, and as it is by the following character:that floweth with milk and honey; aboundeth with all good things; see Ex 3:8, and they shall have eaten and filled themselves, and waxen fat; that is, after they have for a considerable time enjoyed the good things of the land, and they abound with them, and increase in them, and have great fullness of them: then will they turn unto other gods: turn from the Lord who has brought them into all this plenty, from the fear, worship, and service of him, and turn to the worship of idols: and serve them: the works of men's hands, and at most but creatures, and not the Creator; than which nothing can be more absurd and stupid, as well as wicked and ungrateful: and provoke me: nothing being more provoking to the Lord than idolatry, it striking at his very nature, being, and glory: and break my covenant; now made with them; this being foretold by the Lord, which exactly came to pass in numerous instances, proves his precise foreknowledge of future events, even such as depend on the inclinations, dispositions, and wills of men. |
|
31:2131:21: եւ ընդդէ՛մ կացցէ նոցա օրհնութիւնդ այդ՝ յանդիմա՛ն լինել վկայ. եւ մի՛ մոռասցի ՚ի բերանոց նոցա, եւ ՚ի բերանոյ զաւակի նոցա. քանզի գիտեմ զչարութիւն նոցա զոր արարին աստ այսօր, յառաջ քան զտանելն իմ զնոսա յերկրին բարութեան զոր երդուայ հարցն նոցա[2048]։ [2048] Այլք. Յերկիրն բարութեան։ [466]Եւ ընդդէմ`` կացցէ նոցա օրհնութիւնդ այդ յանդիման լինել վկայ. եւ մի՛ մոռասցի [467]ի բերանոց նոցա եւ`` ի բերանոյ զաւակի նոցա. քանզի գիտեմ [468]զչարութիւն նոցա զոր արարին աստ`` այսօր յառաջ քան զտանելն իմ զնոսա յերկիրն [469]բարութեան զոր երդուայ [470]հարցն նոցա:21 Այն ժամանակ այդ օրհներգութիւնն իբրեւ վկայութիւն նրանց դէմ պիտի ելնի, նրանք ու նրանց յետնորդները պիտի չմոռանան դա: Ես գիտեմ նրանց չարութիւնը, որ նրանք յղացան այսօր այստեղ, նախքան ես նրանց կը տանեմ այն լաւ երկիրը, որը երդուեցի տալ նրանց հայրերին»[42]: [42] 42. Եբրայերէնը յաւելեալ ունի՝ Երբ նրանք շատ չարիքների ու նեղութիւնների հանդիպեն: 21 Իսկ երբ անոնք շատ չարիքներու ու նեղութիւններու հանդիպին, այս երգը անոնց դէմ պիտի վկայէ. որովհետեւ անոնց զաւակներուն բերնէն պիտի չմոռցուի. վասն զի գիտեմ անոնց խորհուրդը՝ որ այսօր կ’ընեն, քանի որ դեռ իմ երդումով խոստացած երկիրս տարած չեմ զանոնք»։ 31:21: եւ ընդդէ՛մ կացցէ նոցա օրհնութիւնդ այդ՝ յանդիմա՛ն լինել վկայ. եւ մի՛ մոռասցի ՚ի բերանոց նոցա, եւ ՚ի բերանոյ զաւակի նոցա. քանզի գիտեմ զչարութիւն նոցա զոր արարին աստ այսօր, յառաջ քան զտանելն իմ զնոսա յերկրին բարութեան զոր երդուայ հարցն նոցա[2048]։ [2048] Այլք. Յերկիրն բարութեան։ 21 Այն ժամանակ այդ օրհներգութիւնն իբրեւ վկայութիւն նրանց դէմ պիտի ելնի, նրանք ու նրանց յետնորդները պիտի չմոռանան դա: Ես գիտեմ նրանց չարութիւնը, որ նրանք յղացան այսօր այստեղ, նախքան ես նրանց կը տանեմ այն լաւ երկիրը, որը երդուեցի տալ նրանց հայրերին»[42]: [42] 42. Եբրայերէնը յաւելեալ ունի՝ Երբ նրանք շատ չարիքների ու նեղութիւնների հանդիպեն: 21 Իսկ երբ անոնք շատ չարիքներու ու նեղութիւններու հանդիպին, այս երգը անոնց դէմ պիտի վկայէ. որովհետեւ անոնց զաւակներուն բերնէն պիտի չմոռցուի. վասն զի գիտեմ անոնց խորհուրդը՝ որ այսօր կ’ընեն, քանի որ դեռ իմ երդումով խոստացած երկիրս տարած չեմ զանոնք»։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2121: и когда постигнут их многие бедствия и скорби, тогда песнь сия будет против них свидетельством, ибо она не выйдет из уст потомства их. Я знаю мысли их, которые они имеют ныне, прежде нежели Я ввел их в землю, о которой Я клялся. And it shall come to pass, when many evils and troubles are befallen them, that this song shall testify against them as a witness; for it shall not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed: for I know their imagination which they go about, even now, before I have brought them into the land which I sware:31:21 καὶ και and; even ἀντικαταστήσεται αντικαθιστημι resist ἡ ο the ᾠδὴ ωδη song αὕτη ουτος this; he κατὰ κατα down; by πρόσωπον προσωπον face; ahead of μαρτυροῦσα μαρτυρεω testify; attest οὐ ου not γὰρ γαρ for μὴ μη not ἐπιλησθῇ επιλανθανομαι forget ἀπὸ απο from; away στόματος στομα mouth; edge αὐτῶν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away στόματος στομα mouth; edge τοῦ ο the σπέρματος σπερμα seed αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἐγὼ εγω I γὰρ γαρ for οἶδα οιδα aware τὴν ο the πονηρίαν πονηρια harm; malignancy αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ὅσα οσος as much as; as many as ποιοῦσιν ποιεω do; make ὧδε ωδε here σήμερον σημερον today; present πρὸ προ before; ahead of τοῦ ο the εἰσαγαγεῖν εισαγω lead in; bring in με με me αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τὴν ο the ἀγαθήν αγαθος good ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσα ομνυω swear τοῖς ο the πατράσιν πατηρ father αὐτῶν αυτος he; him 31:21 וְ֠ wᵊ וְ and הָיָה hāyˌā היה be כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that תִמְצֶ֨אןָ ṯimṣˌenā מצא find אֹתֹ֜ו ʔōṯˈô אֵת [object marker] רָעֹ֣ות rāʕˈôṯ רָעָה evil רַבֹּות֮ rabbôṯ רַב much וְ wᵊ וְ and צָרֹות֒ ṣārôṯ צָרָה distress וְ֠ wᵊ וְ and עָנְתָה ʕānᵊṯˌā ענה answer הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֨ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֤את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנָיו֙ fānāʸw פָּנֶה face לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵ֔ד ʕˈēḏ עֵד witness כִּ֛י kˈî כִּי that לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תִשָּׁכַ֖ח ṯiššāḵˌaḥ שׁכח forget מִ mi מִן from פִּ֣י ppˈî פֶּה mouth זַרְעֹ֑ו zarʕˈô זֶרַע seed כִּ֧י kˈî כִּי that יָדַ֣עְתִּי yāḏˈaʕtî ידע know אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יִצְרֹ֗ו yiṣrˈô יֵצֶר form אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] ה֤וּא hˈû הוּא he עֹשֶׂה֙ ʕōśˌeh עשׂה make הַ ha הַ the יֹּ֔ום yyˈôm יֹום day בְּ bᵊ בְּ in טֶ֣רֶם ṭˈerem טֶרֶם beginning אֲבִיאֶ֔נּוּ ʔᵃvîʔˈennû בוא come אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבָּֽעְתִּי׃ nišbˈāʕᵊttî שׁבע swear 31:21. postquam invenerint eum mala multa et adflictiones respondebit ei canticum istud pro testimonio quod nulla delebit oblivio ex ore seminis tui scio enim cogitationes eius quae facturus sit hodie antequam introducam eum in terram quam ei pollicitus sumAnd after many evils and afflictions shall have come upon them, this canticle shall answer them for a testimony, which no oblivion shall take away out of the mouth of their seed. For I know their thoughts, and what they are about to do this day, before that I bring them into the land which I have promised them. 21. And it shall come to pass, when many evils and troubles are come upon them, that this song shall testify before them as a witness; for it shall not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed: for I know their imagination which they go about, even now, before I have brought them into the land which I sware. 21: и когда постигнут их многие бедствия и скорби, тогда песнь сия будет против них свидетельством, ибо она не выйдет из уст потомства их. Я знаю мысли их, которые они имеют ныне, прежде нежели Я ввел их в землю, о которой Я клялся. 31:21 καὶ και and; even ἀντικαταστήσεται αντικαθιστημι resist ἡ ο the ᾠδὴ ωδη song αὕτη ουτος this; he κατὰ κατα down; by πρόσωπον προσωπον face; ahead of μαρτυροῦσα μαρτυρεω testify; attest οὐ ου not γὰρ γαρ for μὴ μη not ἐπιλησθῇ επιλανθανομαι forget ἀπὸ απο from; away στόματος στομα mouth; edge αὐτῶν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἀπὸ απο from; away στόματος στομα mouth; edge τοῦ ο the σπέρματος σπερμα seed αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἐγὼ εγω I γὰρ γαρ for οἶδα οιδα aware τὴν ο the πονηρίαν πονηρια harm; malignancy αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ὅσα οσος as much as; as many as ποιοῦσιν ποιεω do; make ὧδε ωδε here σήμερον σημερον today; present πρὸ προ before; ahead of τοῦ ο the εἰσαγαγεῖν εισαγω lead in; bring in με με me αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τὴν ο the ἀγαθήν αγαθος good ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσα ομνυω swear τοῖς ο the πατράσιν πατηρ father αὐτῶν αυτος he; him 31:21 וְ֠ wᵊ וְ and הָיָה hāyˌā היה be כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that תִמְצֶ֨אןָ ṯimṣˌenā מצא find אֹתֹ֜ו ʔōṯˈô אֵת [object marker] רָעֹ֣ות rāʕˈôṯ רָעָה evil רַבֹּות֮ rabbôṯ רַב much וְ wᵊ וְ and צָרֹות֒ ṣārôṯ צָרָה distress וְ֠ wᵊ וְ and עָנְתָה ʕānᵊṯˌā ענה answer הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֨ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֤את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this לְ lᵊ לְ to פָנָיו֙ fānāʸw פָּנֶה face לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵ֔ד ʕˈēḏ עֵד witness כִּ֛י kˈî כִּי that לֹ֥א lˌō לֹא not תִשָּׁכַ֖ח ṯiššāḵˌaḥ שׁכח forget מִ mi מִן from פִּ֣י ppˈî פֶּה mouth זַרְעֹ֑ו zarʕˈô זֶרַע seed כִּ֧י kˈî כִּי that יָדַ֣עְתִּי yāḏˈaʕtî ידע know אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יִצְרֹ֗ו yiṣrˈô יֵצֶר form אֲשֶׁ֨ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] ה֤וּא hˈû הוּא he עֹשֶׂה֙ ʕōśˌeh עשׂה make הַ ha הַ the יֹּ֔ום yyˈôm יֹום day בְּ bᵊ בְּ in טֶ֣רֶם ṭˈerem טֶרֶם beginning אֲבִיאֶ֔נּוּ ʔᵃvîʔˈennû בוא come אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבָּֽעְתִּי׃ nišbˈāʕᵊttî שׁבע swear 31:21. postquam invenerint eum mala multa et adflictiones respondebit ei canticum istud pro testimonio quod nulla delebit oblivio ex ore seminis tui scio enim cogitationes eius quae facturus sit hodie antequam introducam eum in terram quam ei pollicitus sum And after many evils and afflictions shall have come upon them, this canticle shall answer them for a testimony, which no oblivion shall take away out of the mouth of their seed. For I know their thoughts, and what they are about to do this day, before that I bring them into the land which I have promised them. 21. And it shall come to pass, when many evils and troubles are come upon them, that this song shall testify before them as a witness; for it shall not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed: for I know their imagination which they go about, even now, before I have brought them into the land which I sware. ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ |
jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:21: This song shall testify against them - Because in it their general defection is predicted, but in such a way as to show them how to avoid the evil; and if they did not avoid the evil, and the threatened punishment should come upon them, then the song should testify against them, by showing that they had been sufficiently warned, and might have lived to God, and so escaped those disasters.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:21: this song: A sacred song, appointed to be composed by Moses, doubtless under divine inspiration; which the people were required to learn, and teach to their children from generation to generation. Deu 31:19against: Heb. before I know: Gen 6:5, Gen 8:21; Psa 139:2; Isa 46:10; Eze 38:10, Eze 38:11; Hos 5:3, Hos 13:5, Hos 13:6; Amo 5:25, Amo 5:26; Joh 2:24, Joh 2:25; Act 2:23, Act 4:28 go about: Heb. do Geneva 159931:21 And it shall come to pass, when many evils and troubles are befallen them, that this song shall (l) testify against them as a witness; for it shall not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed: for I know their imagination which they go about, even now, before I have brought them into the land which I sware.(l) That these evils are come upon them, because they have forsaken me. John Gill31:21 And it shall come to pass, when many evils and troubles are befallen them,.... As did in the times of the judges, in the Babylonish captivity, and do now in their present exile:that this song shall testify against them as a witness; which so clearly points at their sins, with all their aggravated circumstances, and describes so fully their calamities, distresses, and punishment for them: for it shall not be forgotten out of the mouths of their seed; which shows that it respects time to come, their later posterity, whose memory of this song would be conjured up by the evils that should come upon them for their sins; nor is it forgotten by them to this day, who acknowledge there are some things in it now fulfilled or fulfilling in them: for I know their imagination which they go about even now: or are "making" (c); forming and framing within themselves, there being a secret inclination in their minds to idolatry, which were working and contriving schemes to bring it about, and set it up; and this, God, the searcher of hearts, knew full well, and that in process of time this evil imagination would break forth into act, in an open and flagrant manner: before I have brought thee into the land which I sware; to their fathers, to give it to them for an inheritance, as is suggested in Deut 31:20. (c) "faciens", Montanus; "quam facit", Pagninus. John Wesley31:21 Their imaginations - Inclinations to Idolatry, which they do not check, as they ought; and some of them do not only cherish it in their hearts, but as far as they can and dare, secretly practise it, as may be gathered from Amos 5:25; Acts 7:43. |
|
31:2231:22: Եւ գրեա՛ց Մովսէս զօրհնութիւնս զայս յաւուր յայնմիկ, եւ ուսոյց զսա որդւոցն Իսրայէլի։ Եւ գրեաց Մովսէս զօրհնութիւնս զայս յաւուր յայնմիկ, եւ ուսոյց զսա որդւոցն Իսրայելի:22 Այդ օրը Մովսէսը գրեց այս օրհներգութիւնը եւ այն սովորեցրեց իսրայէլացիներին: 22 Ուստի Մովսէս նոյն օրը այս երգը երգեց ու Իսրայէլի որդիներուն սորվեցուց զանիկա։ 31:22: Եւ գրեա՛ց Մովսէս զօրհնութիւնս զայս յաւուր յայնմիկ, եւ ուսոյց զսա որդւոցն Իսրայէլի։ 22 Այդ օրը Մովսէսը գրեց այս օրհներգութիւնը եւ այն սովորեցրեց իսրայէլացիներին: 22 Ուստի Մովսէս նոյն օրը այս երգը երգեց ու Իսրայէլի որդիներուն սորվեցուց զանիկա։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2222: И написал Моисей песнь сию в тот день и научил ей сынов Израилевых. Moses therefore wrote this song the same day, and taught it the children of Israel:31:22 καὶ και and; even ἔγραψεν γραφω write Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs τὴν ο the ᾠδὴν ωδη song ταύτην ουτος this; he ἐν εν in ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day καὶ και and; even ἐδίδαξεν διδασκω teach αὐτὴν αυτος he; him τοὺς ο the υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:22 וַ wa וְ and יִּכְתֹּ֥ב yyiḵtˌōv כתב write מֹשֶׁ֛ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֥ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֖את zzˌōṯ זֹאת this בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֑וּא hˈû הוּא he וַֽ wˈa וְ and יְלַמְּדָ֖הּ yᵊlammᵊḏˌāh למד learn אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּנֵ֥י bᵊnˌê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:22. scripsit ergo Moses canticum et docuit filios IsrahelMoses therefore wrote the canticle, and taught it to the children of Israel. 22. So Moses wrote this song the same day, and taught it the children of Israel. 22: И написал Моисей песнь сию в тот день и научил ей сынов Израилевых. 31:22 καὶ και and; even ἔγραψεν γραφω write Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs τὴν ο the ᾠδὴν ωδη song ταύτην ουτος this; he ἐν εν in ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day καὶ και and; even ἐδίδαξεν διδασκω teach αὐτὴν αυτος he; him τοὺς ο the υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel 31:22 וַ wa וְ and יִּכְתֹּ֥ב yyiḵtˌōv כתב write מֹשֶׁ֛ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֥ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֖את zzˌōṯ זֹאת this בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֑וּא hˈû הוּא he וַֽ wˈa וְ and יְלַמְּדָ֖הּ yᵊlammᵊḏˌāh למד learn אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּנֵ֥י bᵊnˌê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel 31:22. scripsit ergo Moses canticum et docuit filios Israhel ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Moses therefore wrote the canticle, and taught it to the children of Israel. |
jg▾ tr▾ mh▾ all ▾ Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 170622: The Song of Moses.B. C. 1451.22 Moses therefore wrote this song the same day, and taught it the children of Israel. 23 And he gave Joshua the son of Nun a charge, and said, Be strong and of a good courage: for thou shalt bring the children of Israel into the land which I sware unto them: and I will be with thee. 24 And it came to pass, when Moses had made an end of writing the words of this law in a book, until they were finished, 25 That Moses commanded the Levites, which bare the ark of the covenant of the LORD, saying, 26 Take this book of the law, and put it in the side of the ark of the covenant of the LORD your God, that it may be there for a witness against thee. 27 For I know thy rebellion, and thy stiff neck: behold, while I am yet alive with you this day, ye have been rebellious against the LORD; and how much more after my death? 28 Gather unto me all the elders of your tribes, and your officers, that I may speak these words in their ears, and call heaven and earth to record against them. 29 For I know that after my death ye will utterly corrupt yourselves, and turn aside from the way which I have commanded you; and evil will befall you in the latter days; because ye will do evil in the sight of the LORD, to provoke him to anger through the work of your hands. 30 And Moses spake in the ears of all the congregation of Israel the words of this song, until they were ended. Here, I. The charge is given to Joshua, which God has said (v. 14) he would give him. The same in effect that Moses had given him. The same in effect that Moses had given him (v. 7): Be strong and of a good courage, v. 23. Joshua had now heard from God so much of the wickedness of the people whom he was to have the conduct of as could not but be a discouragement to him: "Nay," says God, "how bad soever they are, thou shalt go through thy understanding, for I will be with thee. Thou shalt put them into possession of Canaan. If they afterwards by their sin throw themselves out of it again, that will be no fault of thine, nor any dishonour to thee, therefore be of good courage." II. The solemn delivery of the book of the law to the Levites, to be deposited in the side of the ark, is here again related (v. 24-26), of which before, v. 9. Only they are here directed where to treasure up this precious original, not in the ark (there only the two tables were preserved), but in another box by the side of the ark. It is probable that this was the very book that was found in the house of the Lord (having been somehow or other misplaced) in the days of Josiah (2 Chron. xxxiv. 14), and so perhaps the following words here, that it may be a witness against thee, may particularly point at that event, which happened so long after; for the finding of this very book occasioned the public reading of it by Josiah himself, for a witness against a people who were then almost ripe for their ruin by the Babylonians. III. The song which follows in the next chapter is here delivered to Moses, and by him to the people. He wrote it first (v. 22), as the Spirit of God indited it, and then spoke it in the ears of all the congregation (v. 30), and taught it to them (v. 22), that is, gave out copies of it, and ordered the people to learn it by heart. It was delivered by word of mouth first, and afterwards in writing, to the elders and officers, as the representatives of their respective tribes (v. 28), by them to be transmitted to their several families and households. It was delivered to them with a solemn appeal to heaven and earth concerning the fair warning which was given them by it of the fatal consequences of their apostasy from God, and with a declaration of the little joy and little hope Moses had in and concerning them. 1. He declares what little joy he had had of them while he was with them, v. 27. It is not in a passion that he says, I know thy rebellion (as once he said unadvisedly, Hear now, you rebels), but it is the result of a long acquaintance with them: you have been rebellious against the Lord. Their rebellions against himself he makes no mention of: these he had long since forgiven and forgotten; but they must be made to hear of their rebellions against God, that they may be ever repented of and never repeated. 2. What little hopes he had of them now that he was leaving them. From what God had now said to him (v. 16) more than from his own experience of them, though that was discouraging enough, he tells them (v. 29), I know that after my death you will utterly corrupt yourselves. Many a sad thought, no doubt, it occasioned to this good man, to foresee the apostasy and ruin of a people he had taken so much pains with, in order to them good and make them happy; but this was his comfort, that he had done his duty, and that God would be glorified, if not in their settlement, yet in their dispersion. Thus our Lord Jesus, a little before his death, foretold the rise of false Christs and false prophets (Matt. xxiv. 24), notwithstanding which, and all the apostasies of the latter times, we may be confident that the gates of hell shall not prevail against the church, for the foundation of God stands sure. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:22: Deu 31:9, Deu 31:19John Gill31:22 Moses therefore wrote this song the same day,.... The same day it was dictated to him by divine inspiration; he wrote it, as Josephus says (d),"in hexameter verse, which he left in the holy Bible or book (the Pentateuch), containing (as he adds) a prophecy of things future, according to which all things have been done, and are done; and in nothing of it has he erred from the truth;''which is a very just account of it, and worthy of observation:and taught it the children of Israel; instructed them in the meaning of it, directed them to repeat it frequently, to lay it up in their memories, and often meditate upon it; as being a divine composition, and of great importance, as the consideration of it will make appear. (d) Antiqu. l. 4. c. 8. sect. 44. |
|
31:2331:23: Եւ պատուիրեաց Մովսէս Յեսուայ որդւոյ Նաւեայ՝ եւ ասէ. Քա՛ջ լեր՝ եւ զօրացի՛ր. զի դո՛ւ տանելոց ես զորդիսն Իսրայէլի յերկիրն զոր խոստացաւ տա՛լ նոցա Տէր, եւ նա եղիցի ընդ քեզ։ Եւ պատուիրեաց [471]Մովսէս Յեսուայ որդւոյ Նաւեայ եւ ասէ. Քաջ լեր եւ զօրացիր. զի դու տանելոց ես զորդիսն Իսրայելի յերկիրն զոր [472]խոստացաւ տալ նոցա Տէր, եւ նա եղիցի`` ընդ քեզ:23 Մովսէսը Նաւէի որդի Յեսուին պատուիրելով՝ ասաց. «Քա՛ջ եղիր ու զօրացի՛ր, որովհետեւ Իսրայէլի որդիներին դու ես տանելու այն երկիրը, որ Տէրը խոստացաւ տալ նրանց, եւ Նա լինելու է քեզ հետ»: 23 Տէրը Նաւէի որդիին Յեսուին պատուիրելով ըսաւ. «Զօրացի՛ր ու քա՛ջ եղիր. քանզի Իսրայէլի որդիները դուն պիտի տանիս այն երկիրը, որուն համար անոնց երդում ըրի ու ես քեզի հետ պիտի ըլլամ»։ 31:23: Եւ պատուիրեաց Մովսէս Յեսուայ որդւոյ Նաւեայ՝ եւ ասէ. Քա՛ջ լեր՝ եւ զօրացի՛ր. զի դո՛ւ տանելոց ես զորդիսն Իսրայէլի յերկիրն զոր խոստացաւ տա՛լ նոցա Տէր, եւ նա եղիցի ընդ քեզ։ 23 Մովսէսը Նաւէի որդի Յեսուին պատուիրելով՝ ասաց. «Քա՛ջ եղիր ու զօրացի՛ր, որովհետեւ Իսրայէլի որդիներին դու ես տանելու այն երկիրը, որ Տէրը խոստացաւ տալ նրանց, եւ Նա լինելու է քեզ հետ»: 23 Տէրը Նաւէի որդիին Յեսուին պատուիրելով ըսաւ. «Զօրացի՛ր ու քա՛ջ եղիր. քանզի Իսրայէլի որդիները դուն պիտի տանիս այն երկիրը, որուն համար անոնց երդում ըրի ու ես քեզի հետ պիտի ըլլամ»։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2323: И заповедал Господь Иисусу, сыну Навину, и сказал [ему]: будь тверд и мужествен, ибо ты введешь сынов Израилевых в землю, о которой Я клялся им, и Я буду с тобою. And he gave Joshua the son of Nun a charge, and said, Be strong and of a good courage: for thou shalt bring the children of Israel into the land which I sware unto them: and I will be with thee:31:23 καὶ και and; even ἐνετείλατο εντελλομαι direct; enjoin Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs Ἰησοῖ ιησους Iēsous; Iisus καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak αὐτῷ αυτος he; him ἀνδρίζου ανδριζομαι man; valiant καὶ και and; even ἴσχυε ισχυω have means; have force σὺ συ you γὰρ γαρ for εἰσάξεις εισαγω lead in; bring in τοὺς ο the υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσεν ομνυω swear κύριος κυριος lord; master αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even αὐτὸς αυτος he; him ἔσται ειμι be μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your 31:23 וַ wa וְ and יְצַ֞ו yᵊṣˈaw צוה command אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהֹושֻׁ֣עַ yᵊhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua בִּן־ bin- בֵּן son נ֗וּן nˈûn נוּן Nun וַ wa וְ and יֹּאמֶר֮ yyōmer אמר say חֲזַ֣ק ḥᵃzˈaq חזק be strong וֶֽ wˈe וְ and אֱמָץ֒ ʔᵉmˌāṣ אמץ be strong כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that אַתָּ֗ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you תָּבִיא֙ tāvî בוא come אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּנֵ֣י bᵊnˈê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתִּי nišbˈaʕtî שׁבע swear לָהֶ֑ם lāhˈem לְ to וְ wᵊ וְ and אָנֹכִ֖י ʔānōḵˌî אָנֹכִי i אֶֽהְיֶ֥ה ʔˈehyˌeh היה be עִמָּֽךְ׃ ʕimmˈāḵ עִם with 31:23. praecepitque Iosue filio Nun et ait confortare et esto robustus tu enim introduces filios Israhel in terram quam pollicitus sum et ego ero tecumAnd the Lord commanded Josue the son of Nun, and said: Take courage, and be valiant: for thou shalt bring the children of Israel into the land which I have promised, and I will be with thee. 23. And he gave Joshua the son of Nun a charge, and said, Be strong and of a good courage: for thou shalt bring the children of Israel into the land which I sware unto them: and I will be with thee. 23: И заповедал Господь Иисусу, сыну Навину, и сказал [ему]: будь тверд и мужествен, ибо ты введешь сынов Израилевых в землю, о которой Я клялся им, и Я буду с тобою. 31:23 καὶ και and; even ἐνετείλατο εντελλομαι direct; enjoin Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs Ἰησοῖ ιησους Iēsous; Iisus καὶ και and; even εἶπεν επω say; speak αὐτῷ αυτος he; him ἀνδρίζου ανδριζομαι man; valiant καὶ και and; even ἴσχυε ισχυω have means; have force σὺ συ you γὰρ γαρ for εἰσάξεις εισαγω lead in; bring in τοὺς ο the υἱοὺς υιος son Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land ἣν ος who; what ὤμοσεν ομνυω swear κύριος κυριος lord; master αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even αὐτὸς αυτος he; him ἔσται ειμι be μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your 31:23 וַ wa וְ and יְצַ֞ו yᵊṣˈaw צוה command אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] יְהֹושֻׁ֣עַ yᵊhôšˈuₐʕ יְהֹושֻׁעַ Joshua בִּן־ bin- בֵּן son נ֗וּן nˈûn נוּן Nun וַ wa וְ and יֹּאמֶר֮ yyōmer אמר say חֲזַ֣ק ḥᵃzˈaq חזק be strong וֶֽ wˈe וְ and אֱמָץ֒ ʔᵉmˌāṣ אמץ be strong כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that אַתָּ֗ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you תָּבִיא֙ tāvî בוא come אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] בְּנֵ֣י bᵊnˈê בֵּן son יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הָ hā הַ the אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתִּי nišbˈaʕtî שׁבע swear לָהֶ֑ם lāhˈem לְ to וְ wᵊ וְ and אָנֹכִ֖י ʔānōḵˌî אָנֹכִי i אֶֽהְיֶ֥ה ʔˈehyˌeh היה be עִמָּֽךְ׃ ʕimmˈāḵ עִם with 31:23. praecepitque Iosue filio Nun et ait confortare et esto robustus tu enim introduces filios Israhel in terram quam pollicitus sum et ego ero tecum ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ And the Lord commanded Josue the son of Nun, and said: Take courage, and be valiant: for thou shalt bring the children of Israel into the land which I have promised, and I will be with thee. |
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-191423: Господь первый раз обращается непосредственно к И. Навину, так как время фактического вступления его в должность народного вождя уже приблизилось.Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:23He gave - i. e., the Lord gave. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:23: he gave Joshua: Deu 31:7, Deu 31:8, Deu 31:14; Jos 1:5-9shalt bring: Deu 31:3, Deu 3:28; Act 7:45 John Gill31:23 And he gave Joshua the son of Nun a charge,.... It may be a question who gave this charge, the Lord or Moses; according to the connection of the words with the preceding, it seems to be the latter; for the immediate antecedent to the relative he is Moses, and so the Septuagint interpreters understand it; but then they are obliged to read some following clauses different from the original, as, instead of "I swear", they read "the Lord sware"; and the last clause they read, "and he shall be with thee"; but Aben Ezra gives the same sense without departing from the common and genuine reading, supposing that Moses gave the charge in the name and by the authority of the Lord; his words are,"he gave charge by the commandment of the Lord, therefore he saith, "which I sware unto them";''but it seems best to understand this of the Lord himself, since he ordered Moses and Joshua to present themselves before him, that he might give the latter a charge, Deut 31:14; and the language of the following clauses best agrees with him:and said, be strong and of a good courage; See Gill on Deut 31:6; See Gill on Deut 31:7, for thou shalt bring the children of Israel into the land which I sware unto them; See Gill on Deut 31:7; and I will be with thee; See Gill on Deut 31:8; the Targum of Jonathan is,"my Word shall be thy help.'' |
|
31:2431:24: Եւ իբրեւ կատարեա՛ց Մովսէս գրել զամենայն զբանս օրինացս այսոցիկ ՚ի մատենի մինչեւ իսպառ. Եւ իբրեւ կատարեաց Մովսէս գրել զամենայն զբանս օրինացս այսոցիկ ի մատենի մինչեւ ի սպառ:24 Երբ Մովսէսն այս օրէնքների բոլոր խօսքերը մինչեւ վերջ գրեց մատեանի մէջ ու աւարտեց, 24 Երբ Մովսէս այս օրէնքին բոլոր խօսքերը գրքի մը մէջ գրեց լմնցուց, 31:24: Եւ իբրեւ կատարեա՛ց Մովսէս գրել զամենայն զբանս օրինացս այսոցիկ ՚ի մատենի մինչեւ իսպառ. 24 Երբ Մովսէսն այս օրէնքների բոլոր խօսքերը մինչեւ վերջ գրեց մատեանի մէջ ու աւարտեց, 24 Երբ Մովսէս այս օրէնքին բոլոր խօսքերը գրքի մը մէջ գրեց լմնցուց, zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2424: Когда Моисей вписал в книгу все слова закона сего до конца, And it came to pass, when Moses had made an end of writing the words of this law in a book, until they were finished:31:24 ἡνίκα ηνικα whenever; when δὲ δε though; while συνετέλεσεν συντελεω consummate; finish Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs γράφων γραφω write πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for βιβλίον βιβλιον scroll ἕως εως till; until εἰς εις into; for τέλος τελος completion; sales tax 31:24 וַ wa וְ and יְהִ֣י׀ yᵊhˈî היה be כְּ kᵊ כְּ as כַלֹּ֣ות ḵallˈôṯ כלה be complete מֹשֶׁ֗ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses לִ li לְ to כְתֹּ֛ב ḵᵊttˈōv כתב write אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] דִּבְרֵ֥י divrˌê דָּבָר word הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָֽה־ ttôrˈā- תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֖את zzˌōṯ זֹאת this עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon סֵ֑פֶר sˈēfer סֵפֶר letter עַ֖ד ʕˌaḏ עַד unto תֻּמָּֽם׃ tummˈām תמם be complete 31:24. postquam ergo scripsit Moses verba legis huius in volumine atque conplevitTherefore after Moses had wrote the words of this law in a volume, and finished it: 24. And it came to pass, when Moses had made an end of writing the words of this law in a book, until they were finished, 24: Когда Моисей вписал в книгу все слова закона сего до конца, 31:24 ἡνίκα ηνικα whenever; when δὲ δε though; while συνετέλεσεν συντελεω consummate; finish Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs γράφων γραφω write πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he εἰς εις into; for βιβλίον βιβλιον scroll ἕως εως till; until εἰς εις into; for τέλος τελος completion; sales tax 31:24 וַ wa וְ and יְהִ֣י׀ yᵊhˈî היה be כְּ kᵊ כְּ as כַלֹּ֣ות ḵallˈôṯ כלה be complete מֹשֶׁ֗ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses לִ li לְ to כְתֹּ֛ב ḵᵊttˈōv כתב write אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] דִּבְרֵ֥י divrˌê דָּבָר word הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָֽה־ ttôrˈā- תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֖את zzˌōṯ זֹאת this עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon סֵ֑פֶר sˈēfer סֵפֶר letter עַ֖ד ʕˌaḏ עַד unto תֻּמָּֽם׃ tummˈām תמם be complete 31:24. postquam ergo scripsit Moses verba legis huius in volumine atque conplevit ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Therefore after Moses had wrote the words of this law in a volume, and finished it: |
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾ Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:24: Moses completes the writing out of the book of the Law, and directs it to be placed by the ark of the covenant.31:24 R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:24: writing the words: Deu 31:9, Deu 17:18Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch31:24With the installation of Joshua on the part of God, the official life of Moses was brought to a close. Having returned from the tabernacle, he finished the writing out of the laws, and then gave the book of the law to the Levites, with a command to put it by the side of the ark of the covenant, that it might be there for a witness against the people, as He knew its rebellion and stiffneckedness (Deut 31:24-27). על־ספר כּתב, to write upon a book, equivalent to write down, commit to writing. תּמּם עד, till their being finished, i.e., complete. By the "Levites who bare the ark of the covenant" we are not to understand ordinary Levites, but the Levitical priests, who were entrusted with the ark. "The Levites" is simply a contraction for the full expression, "the priests the sons of Levi" (Deut 31:9). It is true that, according to Num 4:4., the Kohathites were appointed to carry the holy vessels, which included the ark of the covenant, on the journey through the desert; but it was the priests, and not they, who were the true bearers and guardians of the holy things, as we may see from the fact that the priests had first of all to wrap up these holy things in a careful manner, before they handed them over to the Kohathites, that they might not touch the holy things and die (Num 4:15). Hence we find that on solemn occasions, when the ark was to be brought out in all its full significance and glory, - as, for example, in the crossing of the Jordan (Josh 3:3., Deut 4:9-10), when encompassing Jericho (Josh 6:6, Josh 6:12), at the setting up of the law on Ebal and Gerizim (Josh 8:33), and at the consecration of Solomon's temple (3Kings 8:3), - it was not by the Levites, but by the priests, that the ark of the covenant was borne. In fact the Levites were, strictly speaking, only their (the priests') servants, who relieved them of this and the other labour, so that what they did was done in a certain sense through them. If the (non-priestly) Levites were not to touch the ark of the covenant, and not even to put in the poles (Num 4:6), Moses would not have handed over the law-book, to be kept by the ark of the covenant to them, but to the priests. ארון מצּד, at the side of the ark, or, according to the paraphrase of Jonathan, "in a case on the right side of the ark of the covenant," which may be correct, although we must not think of this case, as many of the early theologians do, as a secondary ark attached to the ark of the covenant (see Lundius, Jd. Heiligth. pp. 73, 74). The tables of the law were deposited in the ark (Ex 25:16; Ex 40:20), and the book of the law was to be kept by its side. As it formed, from its very nature, simply an elaborate commentary upon the decalogue, it was also to have its place outwardly as an accompaniment to the tables of the law, for a witness against the people, in the same manner as the song in the mouth of the people (Deut 31:21). For, as Moses adds in Deut 31:27, in explanation of his instructions, "I know thy rebelliousness, and thy stiff neck: behold, while I am yet alive with you this day, ye have been rebellious against the Lord (vid., Deut 9:7); and how much more after my death." With these words Moses handed over the complete book of the law to the Levitical priests. For although the handing over is not expressly mentioned, it is unquestionably implied in the words, "Take this book, and put it by the side of the ark of the covenant," as the finishing of the writing of the laws is mentioned immediately before. But if Moses finished the writing of the law after he had received instructions from the Lord to compose the ode, what he wrote will reach to Deut 31:23; and what follows from Deut 31:24 onwards will form the appendix to his work by a different hand. (Note: The objection brought against this view by Riehm, namely, that "it founders on the fact that the style and language in Deut 31:24-30 and Deut 32:44-47 are just the same as in the earlier portion of the book," simply shows that he has not taken into consideration that, with the simple style adopted in Hebrew narrative, we could hardly expect in eleven verses, which contain for the most part simply words and sayings of Moses, to find any very striking difference of language or of style. This objection, therefore, merely proves that no valid arguments can be adduced against the view in question.) The supposition that Moses himself inserted his instructions concerning the preservation of the book of the law, and the ode which follows, is certainly possible, but not probable. The decision as to the place where it should be kept was not of such importance as to need insertion in the book of the law, since sufficient provision for its safe keeping had been made by the directions in Deut 31:9.; and although God had commanded him to write the ode, it was not for the purpose of inserting it on the Thorah as an essential portion of it, but to let the people learn it, to put it in the mouth of the people. The allusion to this ode in Deut 31:19. furnishes no conclusive evidence, either that Moses himself included it in the law-book which he had written with the account of his oration in Deut 31:28-30 and Deut 32:1-43, or that the appendix which Moses did not write commences at Deut 31:14 of this chapter. For all that follows with certainty from the expression "this song" (Deut 31:19 and Deut 31:22), which certainly points to the song in ch. 32, is that Moses himself handed over the ode to the priests with the complete book of the law, as a supplement to the law, and that this ode was then inserted by the writer of the appendix in the appendix itself. John Gill31:24 And it came to pass, when Moses had made an end of writing the words of this law in a book,.... In this book of Deuteronomy, and which concluded the Pentateuch:until they were finished; all the words of the law, and the whole five books of Moses, excepting some few verses, Deut 34:1, which were added by another hand, Joshua or Ezra. |
|
31:2531:25: եւ պատուիրեաց Ղեւտացւոցն որ կրէին զտապանակ ուխտին Տեառն. ասէ. եւ պատուիրեաց Ղեւտացւոցն որ կրէին զտապանակ ուխտին Տեառն, ասէ:25 նա Տիրոջ ուխտի տապանակը տանող ղեւտացիներին պատուիրելով՝ ասաց. 25 Տէրոջը ուխտին տապանակը վերցնող Ղեւտացիներուն պատուիրեց ու ըսաւ. 31:25: եւ պատուիրեաց Ղեւտացւոցն որ կրէին զտապանակ ուխտին Տեառն. ասէ. 25 նա Տիրոջ ուխտի տապանակը տանող ղեւտացիներին պատուիրելով՝ ասաց. 25 Տէրոջը ուխտին տապանակը վերցնող Ղեւտացիներուն պատուիրեց ու ըսաւ. zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2525: тогда Моисей повелел левитам, носящим ковчег завета Господня, сказав: That Moses commanded the Levites, which bare the ark of the covenant of the LORD, saying:31:25 καὶ και and; even ἐνετείλατο εντελλομαι direct; enjoin τοῖς ο the Λευίταις λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis τοῖς ο the αἴρουσιν αιρω lift; remove τὴν ο the κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark τῆς ο the διαθήκης διαθηκη covenant κυρίου κυριος lord; master λέγων λεγω tell; declare 31:25 וַ wa וְ and יְצַ֤ו yᵊṣˈaw צוה command מֹשֶׁה֙ mōšˌeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the לְוִיִּ֔ם lᵊwiyyˈim לֵוִי Levite נֹֽשְׂאֵ֛י nˈōśᵊʔˈê נשׂא lift אֲרֹ֥ון ʔᵃrˌôn אֲרֹון ark בְּרִית־ bᵊrîṯ- בְּרִית covenant יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH לֵ lē לְ to אמֹֽר׃ ʔmˈōr אמר say 31:25. praecepit Levitis qui portabant arcam foederis Domini dicensHe commanded the Levites, who carried the ark of the covenant of the Lord, saying: 25. that Moses commanded the Levites, which bare the ark of the covenant of the LORD, saying, 25: тогда Моисей повелел левитам, носящим ковчег завета Господня, сказав: 31:25 καὶ και and; even ἐνετείλατο εντελλομαι direct; enjoin τοῖς ο the Λευίταις λευιτης Leuΐtēs; Leitis τοῖς ο the αἴρουσιν αιρω lift; remove τὴν ο the κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark τῆς ο the διαθήκης διαθηκη covenant κυρίου κυριος lord; master λέγων λεγω tell; declare 31:25 וַ wa וְ and יְצַ֤ו yᵊṣˈaw צוה command מֹשֶׁה֙ mōšˌeh מֹשֶׁה Moses אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the לְוִיִּ֔ם lᵊwiyyˈim לֵוִי Levite נֹֽשְׂאֵ֛י nˈōśᵊʔˈê נשׂא lift אֲרֹ֥ון ʔᵃrˌôn אֲרֹון ark בְּרִית־ bᵊrîṯ- בְּרִית covenant יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH לֵ lē לְ to אמֹֽר׃ ʔmˈōr אמר say 31:25. praecepit Levitis qui portabant arcam foederis Domini dicens ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ He commanded the Levites, who carried the ark of the covenant of the Lord, saying: |
jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾ Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:25The Levites, which bare the ark - i. e., as in Deu 31:9, "the priests the sons of Levi." The non-priestly Levites could not so much as enter the sanctuary or touch the ark (compare Num 4:15). Though in the journeys through the wilderness the ark was borne by the non-priestly Kohathites, yet on occasions of a more solemn and public character it was carried by the priests themselves (Jos 3:3 ff, Jos 4:9-10; Jos 6:6, Jos 6:12; Jos 8:33; Kg1 8:3). R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:25: bare the ark: Deu 31:9John Gill31:25 That Moses commanded the Levites,.... These were not the common Levites, but the priests who were also Levites, to whom the law was given, Deut 31:9; and none but they might touch the ark, or go so near it as, they are bid to do, to put the law on the side of it; so Aben Ezra; it follows:which bare the ark of the covenant of the Lord; as the priests are said to do; see Gill on Deut 31:9; for though in journeying the Kohathites carried it, yet not until it was covered by the priests, for they must not touch it; as these must do when they put the law on the side of it, as they are ordered in Deut 31:26. saying; as follows. John Wesley31:25 The Levites - The priests, Deut 31:9, who also were Levites. |
|
31:2631:26: Առեալ զմատեա՛ն օրինացդ այդոցիկ՝ դնիցէ՛ք ՚ի կողմանէ տապանակի ուխտին Տեառն Աստուծոյ մերոյ. եւ եղիցի՛ անդ ընդ քեզ ՚ի վկայութիւն[2049]։ [2049] Ոմանք. Եւ եղիցի այդ ընդ քեզ ՚ի վկայ՛՛։ Առեալ զմատեան օրինացդ այդոցիկ դնիցէք ի կողմանէ տապանակի ուխտին Տեառն Աստուծոյ ձերոյ, եւ եղիցի անդ ընդ քեզ ի վկայութիւն:26 «Օրէնքների այս մատեանն առէ՛ք եւ դրէ՛ք մեր Տէր Աստծու ուխտի տապանակի մի կողմը: Դա այնտեղ ձեզ համար վկայութիւն թող լինի: 26 «Այս օրէնքին գիրքը առէք ու զանիկա ձեր Տէր Աստուծոյն ուխտի տապանակին քով դրէք, որպէս զի հոն ձեզի դէմ վկայութեան համար ըլլայ. 31:26: Առեալ զմատեա՛ն օրինացդ այդոցիկ՝ դնիցէ՛ք ՚ի կողմանէ տապանակի ուխտին Տեառն Աստուծոյ մերոյ. եւ եղիցի՛ անդ ընդ քեզ ՚ի վկայութիւն[2049]։ [2049] Ոմանք. Եւ եղիցի այդ ընդ քեզ ՚ի վկայ՛՛։ 26 «Օրէնքների այս մատեանն առէ՛ք եւ դրէ՛ք մեր Տէր Աստծու ուխտի տապանակի մի կողմը: Դա այնտեղ ձեզ համար վկայութիւն թող լինի: 26 «Այս օրէնքին գիրքը առէք ու զանիկա ձեր Տէր Աստուծոյն ուխտի տապանակին քով դրէք, որպէս զի հոն ձեզի դէմ վկայութեան համար ըլլայ. zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2626: возьмите сию книгу закона и положите ее одесную ковчега завета Господа Бога вашего, и она там будет свидетельством против тебя; Take this book of the law, and put it in the side of the ark of the covenant of the LORD your God, that it may be there for a witness against thee:31:26 λαβόντες λαμβανω take; get τὸ ο the βιβλίον βιβλιον scroll τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he θήσετε τιθημι put; make αὐτὸ αυτος he; him ἐκ εκ from; out of πλαγίων πλαγιος the κιβωτοῦ κιβωτος ark τῆς ο the διαθήκης διαθηκη covenant κυρίου κυριος lord; master τοῦ ο the θεοῦ θεος God ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἐκεῖ εκει there ἐν εν in σοὶ σοι you εἰς εις into; for μαρτύριον μαρτυριον evidence; testimony 31:26 לָקֹ֗חַ lāqˈōₐḥ לקח take אֵ֣ת ʔˈēṯ אֵת [object marker] סֵ֤פֶר sˈēfer סֵפֶר letter הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָה֙ ttôrˌā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֶּ֔ה zzˈeh זֶה this וְ wᵊ וְ and שַׂמְתֶּ֣ם śamtˈem שׂים put אֹתֹ֔ו ʔōṯˈô אֵת [object marker] מִ mi מִן from צַּ֛ד ṣṣˈaḏ צַד side אֲרֹ֥ון ʔᵃrˌôn אֲרֹון ark בְּרִית־ bᵊrîṯ- בְּרִית covenant יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֵיכֶ֑ם ʔᵉlōhêḵˈem אֱלֹהִים god(s) וְ wᵊ וְ and הָֽיָה־ hˈāyā- היה be שָׁ֥ם šˌām שָׁם there בְּךָ֖ bᵊḵˌā בְּ in לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵֽד׃ ʕˈēḏ עֵד witness 31:26. tollite librum istum et ponite eum in latere arcae foederis Domini Dei vestri ut sit ibi contra te in testimonioTake this book, and put it in the side of the ark of the covenant of the Lord your God: that it may be there for a testimony against thee. 26. Take this book of the law, and put it by the side of the ark of the covenant of the LORD your God, that it may be there for a witness against thee. 26: возьмите сию книгу закона и положите ее одесную ковчега завета Господа Бога вашего, и она там будет свидетельством против тебя; 31:26 λαβόντες λαμβανω take; get τὸ ο the βιβλίον βιβλιον scroll τοῦ ο the νόμου νομος.1 law τούτου ουτος this; he θήσετε τιθημι put; make αὐτὸ αυτος he; him ἐκ εκ from; out of πλαγίων πλαγιος the κιβωτοῦ κιβωτος ark τῆς ο the διαθήκης διαθηκη covenant κυρίου κυριος lord; master τοῦ ο the θεοῦ θεος God ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἐκεῖ εκει there ἐν εν in σοὶ σοι you εἰς εις into; for μαρτύριον μαρτυριον evidence; testimony 31:26 לָקֹ֗חַ lāqˈōₐḥ לקח take אֵ֣ת ʔˈēṯ אֵת [object marker] סֵ֤פֶר sˈēfer סֵפֶר letter הַ ha הַ the תֹּורָה֙ ttôrˌā תֹּורָה instruction הַ ha הַ the זֶּ֔ה zzˈeh זֶה this וְ wᵊ וְ and שַׂמְתֶּ֣ם śamtˈem שׂים put אֹתֹ֔ו ʔōṯˈô אֵת [object marker] מִ mi מִן from צַּ֛ד ṣṣˈaḏ צַד side אֲרֹ֥ון ʔᵃrˌôn אֲרֹון ark בְּרִית־ bᵊrîṯ- בְּרִית covenant יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֱלֹהֵיכֶ֑ם ʔᵉlōhêḵˈem אֱלֹהִים god(s) וְ wᵊ וְ and הָֽיָה־ hˈāyā- היה be שָׁ֥ם šˌām שָׁם there בְּךָ֖ bᵊḵˌā בְּ in לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵֽד׃ ʕˈēḏ עֵד witness 31:26. tollite librum istum et ponite eum in latere arcae foederis Domini Dei vestri ut sit ibi contra te in testimonio ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Take this book, and put it in the side of the ark of the covenant of the Lord your God: that it may be there for a testimony against thee. |
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:26: Take this book of the law - The standard copy to which all transcripts must ultimately refer: another copy was put into the bands of the priests. See the note on Deu 31:9.Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:26Put it in the side of the ark - Rather, by the side of the ark. The two tables of the Decalogue were in the ark Kg1 8:9; the Book of the Law was to be laid up in the holy of holies close by the ark of the covenant, probably in a chest. Compare Kg2 22:8. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:26: in the side: Kg1 8:9; Kg2 22:8-11; Ch2 34:14, Ch2 34:15a witness: Deu 31:19; Kg2 22:8, Kg2 22:13-19; Rom 3:19, Rom 3:20; Gal 2:19 Geneva 159931:26 Take this book of the law, and put it in the side of the ark of the covenant of the LORD your God, that it may be there for a (m) witness against thee.(m) Of your infidelity, when you turn away from the doctrine contained in it. John Gill31:26 Take this book of the law,.... Not Deuteronomy only, but the whole Pentateuch:and put it in the side of the ark of the covenant of the Lord your God; not in the ark, for there were nothing there but the two tables of stone with the ten commands on them, 3Kings 8:9; but on one side of it; the Targum of Jonathan says, it was"put in a chest (or box) on the right side of the ark of the covenant;''which is very probable. Jarchi observes, that the wise men of Israel are divided about it in the Talmud (e); some of them say there was a table (or ledge) that stood out from the ark without, and there it was put; others say it was put on the side of the tables of the law within the ark; the former are in the right: that it may be therefore a witness against thee; when they fall into idolatry or any other sin, a transgression of any of the laws therein contained. (e) T. B. Bava Bathra, fol. 14. 1. 2. John Wesley31:26 Take this book - Probably the very same book, which (after having been some way misplaced) was found in the house of the Lord, in the days of Josiah, and publickly read by the king himself, for a witness against a people, who were then almost ripe for ruin. In the side - In the outside, in a little chest fixed to it, for nothing but the tables of stone were contained in the ark, 3Kings 8:9, here it was kept for greater security and reverence. A witness against thee - Against thy people, to whom he turns his speech that they might be the more affected with it.Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown31:26 Take this book of the law, and put it in the side of the ark--The second copy of the law (see on Deut 31:9) was deposited for greater security and reverence in a little chest beside the ark of the covenant, for there was nothing contained within it but the tables of stone (3Kings 8:9). Others think it was put within the ark, it being certain, from the testimony of Paul (Heb 9:4), that there were once other things inside the ark, and that this was the copy found in the time of Josiah (4Kings 22:8). |
|
31:2731:27: Զի ես գիտեմ զհեստութիւն քո եւ զխի՛ստ պարանոց քո. զի մինչդեռ ես ընդ ձեզ կենդանի՛ եմ այսօր, դառնացուցիչք էք աստուածակողմանն, ո՞րպէս ո՛չ ապաքէն եւ յե՛տ մահուան իմոյ[2050]։ [2050] Ոմանք. Զի ես գիտեմ... եւ զխստապարանոց քո։ Ուր յօրինակին պակասէր. Որպէ՛ս ո՛չ ապաքէն եւ յետ. բայց ՚ի լուս՛՛. նշանակի ՚ի մէջ առնուլ. համաձայն այլոց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։ զի ես գիտեմ զհեստութիւն քո եւ զխիստ պարանոց քո. զի մինչդեռ ես ընդ ձեզ կենդանի եմ այսօր, դառնացուցիչք էք [473]Աստուածակողմանն, ո՞րպէս ոչ ապաքէն եւ յետ մահուան իմոյ:27 Ես գիտեմ ձեր ըմբոստութիւնն ու կամակորութիւնը. եթէ այսօր, երբ ես կենդանի եմ ու ձեր մէջ, եւ դուք Աստծու դէմ ապստամբում էք, ապա իմ մահուանից յետոյ ինչե՜ր կ’անէք: 27 Քանզի ես քու ապստամբութիւնդ ու քու պարանոցիդ խստութիւնը գիտեմ։ Այսօր, երբ տակաւին ես ողջ եմ, դուք Տէրոջը դէմ ապստամբութիւն կ’ընէք, ա՛լ որչա՜փ աւելի իմ մեռնելէս ետքը։ 31:27: Զի ես գիտեմ զհեստութիւն քո եւ զխի՛ստ պարանոց քո. զի մինչդեռ ես ընդ ձեզ կենդանի՛ եմ այսօր, դառնացուցիչք էք աստուածակողմանն, ո՞րպէս ո՛չ ապաքէն եւ յե՛տ մահուան իմոյ[2050]։ [2050] Ոմանք. Զի ես գիտեմ... եւ զխստապարանոց քո։ Ուր յօրինակին պակասէր. Որպէ՛ս ո՛չ ապաքէն եւ յետ. բայց ՚ի լուս՛՛. նշանակի ՚ի մէջ առնուլ. համաձայն այլոց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։ 27 Ես գիտեմ ձեր ըմբոստութիւնն ու կամակորութիւնը. եթէ այսօր, երբ ես կենդանի եմ ու ձեր մէջ, եւ դուք Աստծու դէմ ապստամբում էք, ապա իմ մահուանից յետոյ ինչե՜ր կ’անէք: 27 Քանզի ես քու ապստամբութիւնդ ու քու պարանոցիդ խստութիւնը գիտեմ։ Այսօր, երբ տակաւին ես ողջ եմ, դուք Տէրոջը դէմ ապստամբութիւն կ’ընէք, ա՛լ որչա՜փ աւելի իմ մեռնելէս ետքը։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2727: ибо я знаю упорство твое и жестоковыйность твою: вот и теперь, когда я живу с вами ныне, вы упорны пред Господом; не тем ли более по смерти моей? For I know thy rebellion, and thy stiff neck: behold, while I am yet alive with you this day, ye have been rebellious against the LORD; and how much more after my death:31:27 ὅτι οτι since; that ἐγὼ εγω I ἐπίσταμαι επισταμαι well aware; stand over τὸν ο the ἐρεθισμόν ερεθισμος of you; your καὶ και and; even τὸν ο the τράχηλόν τραχηλος neck σου σου of you; your τὸν ο the σκληρόν σκληρος hard; harsh ἔτι ετι yet; still γὰρ γαρ for ἐμοῦ εμου my ζῶντος ζαω live; alive μεθ᾿ μετα with; amid ὑμῶν υμων your σήμερον σημερον today; present παραπικραίνοντες παραπικραινω exasperate ἦτε ειμι be τὰ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward τὸν ο the θεόν θεος God πῶς πως.1 how οὐχὶ ουχι not; not actually καὶ και and; even ἔσχατον εσχατος last; farthest part τοῦ ο the θανάτου θανατος death μου μου of me; mine 31:27 כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that אָנֹכִ֤י ʔānōḵˈî אָנֹכִי i יָדַ֨עְתִּי֙ yāḏˈaʕtî ידע know אֶֽת־ ʔˈeṯ- אֵת [object marker] מֶרְיְךָ֔ meryᵊḵˈā מְרִי rebellion וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶֽת־ ʔˈeṯ- אֵת [object marker] עָרְפְּךָ֖ ʕorpᵊḵˌā עֹרֶף neck הַ ha הַ the קָּשֶׁ֑ה qqāšˈeh קָשֶׁה hard הֵ֣ן hˈēn הֵן behold בְּ bᵊ בְּ in עֹודֶנִּי֩ ʕôḏennˌî עֹוד duration חַ֨י ḥˌay חַי alive עִמָּכֶ֜ם ʕimmāḵˈem עִם with הַ ha הַ the יֹּ֗ום yyˈôm יֹום day מַמְרִ֤ים mamrˈîm מרה rebel הֱיִתֶם֙ hᵉʸiṯˌem היה be עִם־ ʕim- עִם with יְהֹוָ֔ה [yᵊhôˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH וְ wᵊ וְ and אַ֖ף ʔˌaf אַף even כִּי־ kî- כִּי that אַחֲרֵ֥י ʔaḥᵃrˌê אַחַר after מֹותִֽי׃ môṯˈî מָוֶת death 31:27. ego enim scio contentionem tuam et cervicem tuam durissimam adhuc vivente me et ingrediente vobiscum semper contentiose egistis contra Dominum quanto magis cum mortuus fueroFor I know thy obstinacy, and thy most stiff neck. While I am yet living, and going in with you, you have always been rebellious against the Lord: how much more when I shall be dead? 27. For I know thy rebellion, and thy stiff neck: behold, while I am yet alive with you this day, ye have been rebellious against the LORD; and how much more after my death? 27: ибо я знаю упорство твое и жестоковыйность твою: вот и теперь, когда я живу с вами ныне, вы упорны пред Господом; не тем ли более по смерти моей? 31:27 ὅτι οτι since; that ἐγὼ εγω I ἐπίσταμαι επισταμαι well aware; stand over τὸν ο the ἐρεθισμόν ερεθισμος of you; your καὶ και and; even τὸν ο the τράχηλόν τραχηλος neck σου σου of you; your τὸν ο the σκληρόν σκληρος hard; harsh ἔτι ετι yet; still γὰρ γαρ for ἐμοῦ εμου my ζῶντος ζαω live; alive μεθ᾿ μετα with; amid ὑμῶν υμων your σήμερον σημερον today; present παραπικραίνοντες παραπικραινω exasperate ἦτε ειμι be τὰ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward τὸν ο the θεόν θεος God πῶς πως.1 how οὐχὶ ουχι not; not actually καὶ και and; even ἔσχατον εσχατος last; farthest part τοῦ ο the θανάτου θανατος death μου μου of me; mine 31:27 כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that אָנֹכִ֤י ʔānōḵˈî אָנֹכִי i יָדַ֨עְתִּי֙ yāḏˈaʕtî ידע know אֶֽת־ ʔˈeṯ- אֵת [object marker] מֶרְיְךָ֔ meryᵊḵˈā מְרִי rebellion וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶֽת־ ʔˈeṯ- אֵת [object marker] עָרְפְּךָ֖ ʕorpᵊḵˌā עֹרֶף neck הַ ha הַ the קָּשֶׁ֑ה qqāšˈeh קָשֶׁה hard הֵ֣ן hˈēn הֵן behold בְּ bᵊ בְּ in עֹודֶנִּי֩ ʕôḏennˌî עֹוד duration חַ֨י ḥˌay חַי alive עִמָּכֶ֜ם ʕimmāḵˈem עִם with הַ ha הַ the יֹּ֗ום yyˈôm יֹום day מַמְרִ֤ים mamrˈîm מרה rebel הֱיִתֶם֙ hᵉʸiṯˌem היה be עִם־ ʕim- עִם with יְהֹוָ֔ה [yᵊhôˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH וְ wᵊ וְ and אַ֖ף ʔˌaf אַף even כִּי־ kî- כִּי that אַחֲרֵ֥י ʔaḥᵃrˌê אַחַר after מֹותִֽי׃ môṯˈî מָוֶת death 31:27. ego enim scio contentionem tuam et cervicem tuam durissimam adhuc vivente me et ingrediente vobiscum semper contentiose egistis contra Dominum quanto magis cum mortuus fuero ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ For I know thy obstinacy, and thy most stiff neck. While I am yet living, and going in with you, you have always been rebellious against the Lord: how much more when I shall be dead? |
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ all ▾ Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 183131:27: While I am yet alive - ye have been rebellious - Such was the disposition of this people to act contrary to moral goodness that Moses felt himself justified in inferring what would take place from what had already happened.1. Never was a people more fully and faithfully warned, and from this very circumstance we may see that they were under no fatal constraining necessity to commit sin against God; they might have avoided it, but they would not. God was present to help them, till by their repeated provocations they forced him to depart: wrath therefore came upon them to the uttermost because they sinned when they might have lived to the glory of God. Those who abuse God's grace shall not only have that grace taken away from them, but shall be punished for the abuse of it, as well as for the transgression. Every sin is double, and must have a twofold punishment; for 1. Grace is resisted; 2. Transgression is committed; and God will visit for both. 2. How astonishing it is that, with such examples of God's justice before their eyes, the Jews should be so little affected; and that the Gentiles, who have received the Gospel of God, should act as if God would no more punish transgression, or that he must be so partial to them as to pass by iniquities for which the hand of his justice still continues heavy upon the descendants of Jacob! Let them take heed, for if God spared not the natural branches, he will not spare them. If they sin after the manner of the Jews, they may expect to be partakers with them in their punishments. What God does to nations he will do to individuals who reject his mercy, or trample under foot his grace; the soul that sinneth, and returns not to God by repentance and faith, shall die. This is a decree of God that shall never be reversed, and every day bears witness how strictly he keeps it in view. 3. The ode composed by Moses for this occasion was probably set to some lively and affecting air, and sung by the people. It would be much easier to keep such a song in remembrance, than an equal quantity of prose. The whole would have the additional circumstances of cadence and tune to cause it to be often repeated; and thus insure its being kept in memory. Poetry, though often, nay, generally abused, is nevertheless a gift from God, and may be employed with the best effect in his service. A very considerable part of the Old Testament is written in poetry; particularly the whole book of Psalms, great part of the prophet Isaiah, the Lamentations, and much of the minor prophets. Those who speak against poetic compositions in the service of God, speak against what they do not understand. All that a man hath should be consecrated to his Maker, and employed in his service; not only the energy of his heart and mind, the physical force of his body, but also the musical tones and modulations of his voice. Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 183431:27How much more after my death - Hence, Deu 31:24 and the rest of the book (with the exception of the song, Deu 31:19) must be regarded as a kind of appendix added after Moses' death by another hand; though the Blessing Deut. 33 is of course to be regarded as a composition of Moses. R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:27: I know: Deu 32:20stiff neck: Deu 9:6, Deu 32:20; Exo 32:8; Ch2 30:8; Psa 78:8; Isa 48:4; Act 7:51 ye have been: Deu 9:24 John Gill31:27 For I know thy rebellion and thy stiff neck,.... How rebellious they were against the Lord and his laws, and how unwilling they were to admit the yoke of his commandments to be put upon them, and submit to it; this he had an experience of for forty years past:behold, while I am yet alive with you this day, ye have been rebellious against the Lord; murmuring at his providences, Ex 16:8, speaking against his ministers, Ex 16:2; breaking his laws, particularly being guilty of idolatry, in making and worshipping the golden calf, Ex 32:8; and even now, as in Deut 31:21, were imagining, forming, and framing in their minds something of the same kind, from the time of their coming out of Egypt unto this time they were now on the borders of Canaan; this had all along been their character; see Deut 9:7, and how much more after my death? When he would be no more with them to instruct and advise them, to caution and reprove them, and to keep them in awe by his authority. |
|
31:2831:28: Արդ ժողովեցէ՛ք առ իս զցեղապե՛տս եւ զծերս ձեր, եւ զդատաւորս ձեր, եւ զատենադպիրս ձեր. զի խօսեցա՛յց յականջս նոցա զամենայն զբանս զայսոսիկ. եւ կալայց ձեզ վկա՛յ զերկինս եւ զերկիր։ Արդ ժողովեցէք առ իս [474]զցեղապետս եւ զծերս ձեր եւ զդատաւորս ձեր`` եւ զատենադպիրս ձեր, [475]զի խօսեցայց յականջս նոցա [476]զամենայն զբանս զայսոսիկ, եւ կալայց [477]ձեզ վկայ զերկինս եւ զերկիր:28 Արդ, ինձ մօտ հաւաքեցէ՛ք ձեր ցեղապետներին ու ծերերին, ձեր դատաւորներին ու օրէնսգէտներին, որպէսզի նրանց ասեմ բոլոր այս խօսքերը եւ ձեզ համար վկայ ունենամ երկինքն ու երկիրը: 28 Ձեր ցեղերուն բոլոր ծերերն ու ձեր ոստիկանները իմ առջեւս հաւաքեցէ՛ք, որպէս զի անոնց այս խօսքերը յայտնեմ, որ լսեն եւ երկինքն ու երկիրը վկայ բռնեմ անոնց. 31:28: Արդ ժողովեցէ՛ք առ իս զցեղապե՛տս եւ զծերս ձեր, եւ զդատաւորս ձեր, եւ զատենադպիրս ձեր. զի խօսեցա՛յց յականջս նոցա զամենայն զբանս զայսոսիկ. եւ կալայց ձեզ վկա՛յ զերկինս եւ զերկիր։ 28 Արդ, ինձ մօտ հաւաքեցէ՛ք ձեր ցեղապետներին ու ծերերին, ձեր դատաւորներին ու օրէնսգէտներին, որպէսզի նրանց ասեմ բոլոր այս խօսքերը եւ ձեզ համար վկայ ունենամ երկինքն ու երկիրը: 28 Ձեր ցեղերուն բոլոր ծերերն ու ձեր ոստիկանները իմ առջեւս հաւաքեցէ՛ք, որպէս զի անոնց այս խօսքերը յայտնեմ, որ լսեն եւ երկինքն ու երկիրը վկայ բռնեմ անոնց. zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2828: соберите ко мне всех старейшин колен ваших и надзирателей ваших, и я скажу вслух их слова сии и призову во свидетельство на них небо и землю; Gather unto me all the elders of your tribes, and your officers, that I may speak these words in their ears, and call heaven and earth to record against them:31:28 ἐκκλησιάσατε εκκλησιαζω to; toward με με me τοὺς ο the φυλάρχους φυλαρχος your καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the πρεσβυτέρους πρεσβυτερος senior; older ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the κριτὰς κριτης judge ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the γραμματοεισαγωγεῖς γραμματοεισαγωγευς your ἵνα ινα so; that λαλήσω λαλεω talk; speak εἰς εις into; for τὰ ο the ὦτα ους ear αὐτῶν αυτος he; him πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τούτους ουτος this; he καὶ και and; even διαμαρτύρωμαι διαμαρτυρομαι protest αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him τόν ο the τε τε both; and οὐρανὸν ουρανος sky; heaven καὶ και and; even τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land 31:28 הַקְהִ֧ילוּ haqhˈîlû קהל assemble אֵלַ֛י ʔēlˈay אֶל to אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole זִקְנֵ֥י ziqnˌê זָקֵן old שִׁבְטֵיכֶ֖ם šivṭêḵˌem שֵׁבֶט rod וְ wᵊ וְ and שֹׁטְרֵיכֶ֑ם šōṭᵊrêḵˈem שׁטר register וַ wa וְ and אֲדַבְּרָ֣ה ʔᵃḏabbᵊrˈā דבר speak בְ vᵊ בְּ in אָזְנֵיהֶ֗ם ʔoznêhˈem אֹזֶן ear אֵ֚ת ˈʔēṯ אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the דְּבָרִ֣ים ddᵊvārˈîm דָּבָר word הָ hā הַ the אֵ֔לֶּה ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these וְ wᵊ וְ and אָעִ֣ידָה ʔāʕˈîḏā עוד warn, to witness בָּ֔ם bˈām בְּ in אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שָּׁמַ֖יִם ššāmˌayim שָׁמַיִם heavens וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the אָֽרֶץ׃ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth 31:28. congregate ad me omnes maiores natu per tribus vestras atque doctores et loquar audientibus eis sermones istos et invocabo contra eos caelum et terramGather unto me all the ancients of your tribes, and your doctors, and I will speak these words in their hearing, and will call heaven and earth to witness against them. 28. Assemble unto me all the elders of your tribes, and your officers, that I may speak these words in their ears, and call heaven and earth to witness against them. 28: соберите ко мне всех старейшин колен ваших и надзирателей ваших, и я скажу вслух их слова сии и призову во свидетельство на них небо и землю; 31:28 ἐκκλησιάσατε εκκλησιαζω to; toward με με me τοὺς ο the φυλάρχους φυλαρχος your καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the πρεσβυτέρους πρεσβυτερος senior; older ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the κριτὰς κριτης judge ὑμῶν υμων your καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the γραμματοεισαγωγεῖς γραμματοεισαγωγευς your ἵνα ινα so; that λαλήσω λαλεω talk; speak εἰς εις into; for τὰ ο the ὦτα ους ear αὐτῶν αυτος he; him πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the λόγους λογος word; log τούτους ουτος this; he καὶ και and; even διαμαρτύρωμαι διαμαρτυρομαι protest αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him τόν ο the τε τε both; and οὐρανὸν ουρανος sky; heaven καὶ και and; even τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land 31:28 הַקְהִ֧ילוּ haqhˈîlû קהל assemble אֵלַ֛י ʔēlˈay אֶל to אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole זִקְנֵ֥י ziqnˌê זָקֵן old שִׁבְטֵיכֶ֖ם šivṭêḵˌem שֵׁבֶט rod וְ wᵊ וְ and שֹׁטְרֵיכֶ֑ם šōṭᵊrêḵˈem שׁטר register וַ wa וְ and אֲדַבְּרָ֣ה ʔᵃḏabbᵊrˈā דבר speak בְ vᵊ בְּ in אָזְנֵיהֶ֗ם ʔoznêhˈem אֹזֶן ear אֵ֚ת ˈʔēṯ אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the דְּבָרִ֣ים ddᵊvārˈîm דָּבָר word הָ hā הַ the אֵ֔לֶּה ʔˈēlleh אֵלֶּה these וְ wᵊ וְ and אָעִ֣ידָה ʔāʕˈîḏā עוד warn, to witness בָּ֔ם bˈām בְּ in אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שָּׁמַ֖יִם ššāmˌayim שָׁמַיִם heavens וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the אָֽרֶץ׃ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth 31:28. congregate ad me omnes maiores natu per tribus vestras atque doctores et loquar audientibus eis sermones istos et invocabo contra eos caelum et terram ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Gather unto me all the ancients of your tribes, and your doctors, and I will speak these words in their hearing, and will call heaven and earth to witness against them. |
jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:28: Gather unto me: Deu 31:12, Deu 29:10; Gen 49:1, Gen 49:2; Exo 18:25; Num 11:16, Num 11:17call heaven: Deu 4:26, Deu 30:19, Deu 32:1; Isa 1:2; Luk 19:40 Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch31:28Directly after handing over the book of the law, Moses directed the elders of all the tribes, together with the official persons, to gather round him, that he might rehearse to them the ode which he had written fore the people. The summons, "gather unto me," was addressed to the persons to whom he had given the book of the law. The elders and officers, as the civil authorities of the congregation, were collected together by him to hear the ode, because they were to put it in the mouth of the people, i.e., to take care that all the nation should learn it. The words, "I will call heaven and earth as witnesses against you," refer to the substance of the ode about to be rehearsed, which begins with an appeal to the heaven and the earth (Deut 32:1). The reason assigned for this in Deut 31:29 is a brief summary of what the Lord had said to Moses in Deut 31:16-21, and Moses thought it necessary to communicate to the representatives of the nation. "The work of your hands" refers to the idols (vid., Deut 4:28). Geneva 159931:28 Gather unto me all the elders of your tribes, and your (n) officers, that I may speak these words in their ears, and call heaven and earth to record against them.(n) As governors, judges and magistrates. John Gill31:28 Gather unto me all the elders of your tribes, and your officers,.... The heads of the tribes, the princes, and all other inferior magistrates:that I may speak these words in their ears; not the words of the law, but of the song which he was ordered to write, and is recorded in the following chapter: and call heaven and earth to record against them; to bear witness of what he delivered to them, and to bear witness against them should they transgress the laws he gave them; and to bear witness that they had been faithfully cautioned against transgressing, and had been severely threatened, and the punishment plainly pointed out that should be inflicted on them in case of disobedience, so that they were left entirely without excuse. |
|
31:2931:29: Քանզի գիտեմ եթէ յետ վախճանի իմոյ անօրինելո՛վ անօրինիցէք, եւ խոտորիցիք ՚ի ճանապարհէն զոր պատուիրեցի ձեզ. եւ պատահիցե՛ն ձեզ չարիքն ՚ի վախճանի աւուրց. քանզի առնիցէք չա՛ր առաջի Տեառն, բարկացուցանե՛լ զնա գործովք ձեռաց ձերոց[2051]։ [2051] Ոմանք. Թէ յետ վախճանելոյն իմոյ։ քանզի գիտեմ եթէ յետ վախճանի իմոյ անօրինելով անօրինիցէք, եւ խոտորիցիք ի ճանապարհէն զոր պատուիրեցի ձեզ, եւ պատահիցեն ձեզ չարիքն ի վախճանի աւուրց. քանզի առնիցէք չար առաջի Տեառն` բարկացուցանել զնա գործովք ձեռաց ձերոց:29 Գիտեմ, որ իմ մահուանից յետոյ անպայման անօրէնութիւններ էք անելու, շեղուելու էք այն ճանապարհից, որ ես ձեզ պատուիրեցի, եւ վերջին օրերին ձեզ չարիքներ պիտի պատահեն, որովհետեւ չար գործ էք կատարելու Տիրոջ առջեւ՝ ձեր ձեռնարկած գործերով բարկացնելու էք նրան»: 29 Քանզի գիտեմ թէ իմ մեռնելէս ետքը դուք անշուշտ անօրէնութիւն պիտի ընէք* ու իմ ձեզի պատուիրած ճամբայէս պիտի խոտորիք ու չարիքներու պիտի հանդիպիք. որովհետեւ Տէրոջը առջեւ չարութիւն պիտի ընէք ու ձեր ձեռքերուն գործերովը զանիկա պիտի սրդողեցնէք»։ 31:29: Քանզի գիտեմ եթէ յետ վախճանի իմոյ անօրինելո՛վ անօրինիցէք, եւ խոտորիցիք ՚ի ճանապարհէն զոր պատուիրեցի ձեզ. եւ պատահիցե՛ն ձեզ չարիքն ՚ի վախճանի աւուրց. քանզի առնիցէք չա՛ր առաջի Տեառն, բարկացուցանե՛լ զնա գործովք ձեռաց ձերոց[2051]։ [2051] Ոմանք. Թէ յետ վախճանելոյն իմոյ։ 29 Գիտեմ, որ իմ մահուանից յետոյ անպայման անօրէնութիւններ էք անելու, շեղուելու էք այն ճանապարհից, որ ես ձեզ պատուիրեցի, եւ վերջին օրերին ձեզ չարիքներ պիտի պատահեն, որովհետեւ չար գործ էք կատարելու Տիրոջ առջեւ՝ ձեր ձեռնարկած գործերով բարկացնելու էք նրան»: 29 Քանզի գիտեմ թէ իմ մեռնելէս ետքը դուք անշուշտ անօրէնութիւն պիտի ընէք* ու իմ ձեզի պատուիրած ճամբայէս պիտի խոտորիք ու չարիքներու պիտի հանդիպիք. որովհետեւ Տէրոջը առջեւ չարութիւն պիտի ընէք ու ձեր ձեռքերուն գործերովը զանիկա պիտի սրդողեցնէք»։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:2929: ибо я знаю, что по смерти моей вы развратитесь и уклонитесь от пути, который я завещал вам, и в последствие времени постигнут вас бедствия за то, что вы будете делать зло пред очами Господа, раздражая Его делами рук своих. For I know that after my death ye will utterly corrupt [yourselves], and turn aside from the way which I have commanded you; and evil will befall you in the latter days; because ye will do evil in the sight of the LORD, to provoke him to anger through the work of your hands:31:29 οἶδα οιδα aware γὰρ γαρ for ὅτι οτι since; that ἔσχατον εσχατος last; farthest part τῆς ο the τελευτῆς τελευτη end μου μου of me; mine ἀνομίᾳ ανομια lawlessness ἀνομήσετε ανομεω and; even ἐκκλινεῖτε εκκλινω deviate; avoid ἐκ εκ from; out of τῆς ο the ὁδοῦ οδος way; journey ἧς ος who; what ἐνετειλάμην εντελλομαι direct; enjoin ὑμῖν υμιν you καὶ και and; even συναντήσεται συνανταω meet with ὑμῖν υμιν you τὰ ο the κακὰ κακος bad; ugly ἔσχατον εσχατος last; farthest part τῶν ο the ἡμερῶν ημερα day ὅτι οτι since; that ποιήσετε ποιεω do; make τὸ ο the πονηρὸν πονηρος harmful; malignant ἐναντίον εναντιον next to; before κυρίου κυριος lord; master παροργίσαι παροργιζω enrage; provoke αὐτὸν αυτος he; him ἐν εν in τοῖς ο the ἔργοις εργον work τῶν ο the χειρῶν χειρ hand ὑμῶν υμων your 31:29 כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that יָדַ֗עְתִּי yāḏˈaʕtî ידע know אַחֲרֵ֤י ʔaḥᵃrˈê אַחַר after מֹותִי֙ môṯˌî מָוֶת death כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that הַשְׁחֵ֣ת hašḥˈēṯ שׁחת destroy תַּשְׁחִת֔וּן tašḥiṯˈûn שׁחת destroy וְ wᵊ וְ and סַרְתֶּ֣ם sartˈem סור turn aside מִן־ min- מִן from הַ ha הַ the דֶּ֔רֶךְ ddˈereḵ דֶּרֶךְ way אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] צִוִּ֖יתִי ṣiwwˌîṯî צוה command אֶתְכֶ֑ם ʔeṯᵊḵˈem אֵת [object marker] וְ wᵊ וְ and קָרָ֨את qārˌāṯ קרא encounter אֶתְכֶ֤ם ʔeṯᵊḵˈem אֵת [object marker] הָֽ hˈā הַ the רָעָה֙ rāʕˌā רָעָה evil בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אַחֲרִ֣ית ʔaḥᵃrˈîṯ אַחֲרִית end הַ ha הַ the יָּמִ֔ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that תַעֲשׂ֤וּ ṯaʕᵃśˈû עשׂה make אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the רַע֙ rˌaʕ רַע evil בְּ bᵊ בְּ in עֵינֵ֣י ʕênˈê עַיִן eye יְהוָ֔ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH לְ lᵊ לְ to הַכְעִיסֹ֖ו haḵʕîsˌô כעס be discontent בְּ bᵊ בְּ in מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed יְדֵיכֶֽם׃ yᵊḏêḵˈem יָד hand 31:29. novi enim quod post mortem meam inique agetis et declinabitis cito de via quam praecepi vobis et occurrent vobis mala in extremo tempore quando feceritis malum in conspectu Domini ut inritetis eum per opera manuum vestrarumFor I know that, after my death, you will do wickedly, and will quickly turn aside form the way that I have commanded you: and evils shall come upon you in the latter times, when you shall do evil in the sight of the Lord, to provoke him by the works of your hands. 29. For I know that after my death ye will utterly corrupt yourselves, and turn aside from the way which I have commanded you; and evil will befall you in the latter days; because ye will do that which is evil in the sight of the LORD, to provoke him to anger through the work of your hands. 29: ибо я знаю, что по смерти моей вы развратитесь и уклонитесь от пути, который я завещал вам, и в последствие времени постигнут вас бедствия за то, что вы будете делать зло пред очами Господа, раздражая Его делами рук своих. 31:29 οἶδα οιδα aware γὰρ γαρ for ὅτι οτι since; that ἔσχατον εσχατος last; farthest part τῆς ο the τελευτῆς τελευτη end μου μου of me; mine ἀνομίᾳ ανομια lawlessness ἀνομήσετε ανομεω and; even ἐκκλινεῖτε εκκλινω deviate; avoid ἐκ εκ from; out of τῆς ο the ὁδοῦ οδος way; journey ἧς ος who; what ἐνετειλάμην εντελλομαι direct; enjoin ὑμῖν υμιν you καὶ και and; even συναντήσεται συνανταω meet with ὑμῖν υμιν you τὰ ο the κακὰ κακος bad; ugly ἔσχατον εσχατος last; farthest part τῶν ο the ἡμερῶν ημερα day ὅτι οτι since; that ποιήσετε ποιεω do; make τὸ ο the πονηρὸν πονηρος harmful; malignant ἐναντίον εναντιον next to; before κυρίου κυριος lord; master παροργίσαι παροργιζω enrage; provoke αὐτὸν αυτος he; him ἐν εν in τοῖς ο the ἔργοις εργον work τῶν ο the χειρῶν χειρ hand ὑμῶν υμων your 31:29 כִּ֣י kˈî כִּי that יָדַ֗עְתִּי yāḏˈaʕtî ידע know אַחֲרֵ֤י ʔaḥᵃrˈê אַחַר after מֹותִי֙ môṯˌî מָוֶת death כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that הַשְׁחֵ֣ת hašḥˈēṯ שׁחת destroy תַּשְׁחִת֔וּן tašḥiṯˈûn שׁחת destroy וְ wᵊ וְ and סַרְתֶּ֣ם sartˈem סור turn aside מִן־ min- מִן from הַ ha הַ the דֶּ֔רֶךְ ddˈereḵ דֶּרֶךְ way אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] צִוִּ֖יתִי ṣiwwˌîṯî צוה command אֶתְכֶ֑ם ʔeṯᵊḵˈem אֵת [object marker] וְ wᵊ וְ and קָרָ֨את qārˌāṯ קרא encounter אֶתְכֶ֤ם ʔeṯᵊḵˈem אֵת [object marker] הָֽ hˈā הַ the רָעָה֙ rāʕˌā רָעָה evil בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אַחֲרִ֣ית ʔaḥᵃrˈîṯ אַחֲרִית end הַ ha הַ the יָּמִ֔ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that תַעֲשׂ֤וּ ṯaʕᵃśˈû עשׂה make אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the רַע֙ rˌaʕ רַע evil בְּ bᵊ בְּ in עֵינֵ֣י ʕênˈê עַיִן eye יְהוָ֔ה [yᵊhwˈāh] יְהוָה YHWH לְ lᵊ לְ to הַכְעִיסֹ֖ו haḵʕîsˌô כעס be discontent בְּ bᵊ בְּ in מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed יְדֵיכֶֽם׃ yᵊḏêḵˈem יָד hand 31:29. novi enim quod post mortem meam inique agetis et declinabitis cito de via quam praecepi vobis et occurrent vobis mala in extremo tempore quando feceritis malum in conspectu Domini ut inritetis eum per opera manuum vestrarum ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ For I know that, after my death, you will do wickedly, and will quickly turn aside form the way that I have commanded you: and evils shall come upon you in the latter times, when you shall do evil in the sight of the Lord, to provoke him by the works of your hands. |
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ all ▾ R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:29: corrupt yourselves: Deu 32:5; Jdg 2:19; Isa 1:4; Hos 9:9; Act 20:30; Ti2 3:1-6; Pe2 1:14, Pe2 1:15; Pe2 2:1, Pe2 2:2and evil: Deut. 28:15-68, Deu 29:18-28; Lev. 26:14-46; Ch2 34:24; Luk 19:42-44, Luk 21:24 the latter days: Deu 4:30; Gen 49:1; Job 19:25; Eze 38:8; Ti1 4:1; Ti2 3:1; Heb 1:2; Pe2 3:3 Geneva 159931:29 For I know that after my death ye will utterly corrupt [yourselves], and turn aside from the way which I have commanded you; and evil will befall you in the latter days; because ye will do evil in the sight of the LORD, to provoke him to anger through the (o) work of your hands.(o) By idolatry, and worshipping images, which are the work of your hands. John Gill31:29 For I know that after my death,.... Which was just at hand, some time after that, not immediately; this he knew by a spirit of prophecy, namely, what follows:ye will utterly corrupt yourselves; their ways, works, and manners, and so themselves; corrupt the worship of God by making idols, and serving them, which is the corruption chiefly intended: and turn aside from the way which I have commanded you: from the way of the commandments of God, which Moses had given them in his name, and in which they were directed to walk; but, as here foretold, would wander and swerve from them as they did: and evil will befall you in the latter days; not only in the times of the judges, and in the time of the Babylonish captivity, but in their present captivity, as they call it; which shows that the following song has things in it which respect times at a great distance, and even the present ones, and yet to come: because ye will do evil in the sight of the Lord, to provoke him to anger through the work of your hands; their idols, idolatry being the evil chiefly designed, which is of all things the most provoking of the Lord. |
|
31:3031:30: Եւ խօսեցաւ Մովսէս յականջս ամենայն եկեղեցւոյն Իսրայէլի զբանս օրհնութեանս այսորիկ մինչեւ ՚ի սպառ։ Եւ խօսեցաւ Մովսէս յականջս ամենայն եկեղեցւոյն Իսրայելի զբանս օրհնութեանս այսորիկ մինչեւ ի սպառ:30 Եւ Մովսէսը հաւաքուած բոլոր իսրայէլացիներին մինչեւ վերջ ասաց օրհներգութեան այս խօսքերը. 30 Ուստի այս երգին խօսքերը Իսրայէլի բոլոր ժողովուրդին ականջներուն խօսեցաւ։ 31:30: Եւ խօսեցաւ Մովսէս յականջս ամենայն եկեղեցւոյն Իսրայէլի զբանս օրհնութեանս այսորիկ մինչեւ ՚ի սպառ։ 30 Եւ Մովսէսը հաւաքուած բոլոր իսրայէլացիներին մինչեւ վերջ ասաց օրհներգութեան այս խօսքերը. 30 Ուստի այս երգին խօսքերը Իսրայէլի բոլոր ժողովուրդին ականջներուն խօսեցաւ։ zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾ |
31:3030: И изрек Моисей вслух всего собрания Израильтян слова песни сей до конца: And Moses spake in the ears of all the congregation of Israel the words of this song, until they were ended:31:30 καὶ και and; even ἐλάλησεν λαλεω talk; speak Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs εἰς εις into; for τὰ ο the ὦτα ους ear πάσης πας all; every ἐκκλησίας εκκλησια assembly Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel τὰ ο the ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase τῆς ο the ᾠδῆς ωδη song ταύτης ουτος this; he ἕως εως till; until εἰς εις into; for τέλος τελος completion; sales tax 31:30 וַ wa וְ and יְדַבֵּ֣ר yᵊḏabbˈēr דבר speak מֹשֶׁ֗ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אָזְנֵי֙ ʔoznˌê אֹזֶן ear כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole קְהַ֣ל qᵊhˈal קָהָל assembly יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] דִּבְרֵ֥י divrˌê דָּבָר word הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֖ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֑את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this עַ֖ד ʕˌaḏ עַד unto תֻּמָּֽם׃ פ tummˈām . f תמם be complete 31:30. locutus est ergo Moses audiente universo coetu Israhel verba carminis huius et ad finem usque conplevitMoses therefore spoke, in the hearing of the whole assembly of Israel, the words of this canticle, and finished it even to the end 30. And Moses spake in the ears of all the assembly of Israel the words of this song, until they were finished. 30: И изрек Моисей вслух всего собрания Израильтян слова песни сей до конца: 31:30 καὶ και and; even ἐλάλησεν λαλεω talk; speak Μωυσῆς μωσευς Mōseus; Mosefs εἰς εις into; for τὰ ο the ὦτα ους ear πάσης πας all; every ἐκκλησίας εκκλησια assembly Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel τὰ ο the ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase τῆς ο the ᾠδῆς ωδη song ταύτης ουτος this; he ἕως εως till; until εἰς εις into; for τέλος τελος completion; sales tax 31:30 וַ wa וְ and יְדַבֵּ֣ר yᵊḏabbˈēr דבר speak מֹשֶׁ֗ה mōšˈeh מֹשֶׁה Moses בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אָזְנֵי֙ ʔoznˌê אֹזֶן ear כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole קְהַ֣ל qᵊhˈal קָהָל assembly יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] דִּבְרֵ֥י divrˌê דָּבָר word הַ ha הַ the שִּׁירָ֖ה ššîrˌā שִׁירָה song הַ ha הַ the זֹּ֑את zzˈōṯ זֹאת this עַ֖ד ʕˌaḏ עַד unto תֻּמָּֽם׃ פ tummˈām . f תמם be complete 31:30. locutus est ergo Moses audiente universo coetu Israhel verba carminis huius et ad finem usque conplevit ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾ Moses therefore spoke, in the hearing of the whole assembly of Israel, the words of this canticle, and finished it even to the end |
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾ А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-191430: См. XXX гл. кн. Втор.R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 188031:30: Deu 4:5; Joh 12:49; Act 20:27; Heb 3:2, Heb 3:5Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch31:30Deut 31:30 forms the introduction to the rehearsal of the ode. John Gill31:30 And Moses spake in the ears of all the congregation of Israel,.... Not in the hearing of the whole body of the people, and every individual thereof; no man could be able to speak to such a numerous congregation, as that they should hear him; but in the hearing of their heads and representatives, the elders of their tribes and officers, ordered to be gathered together for this purpose, Deut 31:28,the words of this song, until they were ended; which song is recorded in the following chapter, Deut 32:1. |
|
2000 - 2025 © All Rights Reserved Arak29
for technical questions: contact
for technical questions: contact